Horizon Hobby X378 X-378 7 Channel FM Radio System User Manual X378 Instruction Manual

Horizon Hobby, LLC X-378 7 Channel FM Radio System X378 Instruction Manual

UserManual.wiki >

Horizon Hobby >

X378 User Manual HTML Version

X378 Instruction Manual

X-378

7-CHANNEL COMPUTER

RADIO SYSTEM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FOR AIRPLANE,

HELICOPTER

AND

SAILPLANE

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 1

2X-378 MANUAL Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. INTRODUCTION

Table of Contents 2

1. Using The Manual 4

2. Features 4

2.1 Transmitter 4

2.2 Receiver 4

2.3 Servo Features 5

3. Componenet Specifications

3.1 System Specifications 5

3.2 Transmitter Specifications 5

3.3 Servo Specifications 6

3.4 Receiver Specifications 6

3.5 Charger Specifications 6

3.6 Airborne Battery Pack 6

4. Battery Charging 7

4.1 Transmitter/Receiver 7

4.2 Charger 7

4.3 Advanced Digital Trims 8

II. AIRPLANE SECTION

1. Software Funtions

1.1 Control Identification and Location 9

1.2 Channel Assignment/Throttle ALT 9

A. Airplane Version Transmitter 9

B. Sailplane Mode 10

C. Heli Mode 10

1.3 Transmitter Rear 11

1.4 Control Stick Length Adjustment 12

1.5 Control Stick Tension Adjustment 12

1.6 Direct Servo Control 12

1.7 Neck Strap Attachment 13

1.8 Base Loaded Antenna 13

1.9 Frequency Notes/Aircraft Only Frequencies 13

2. Connections

2.1 Installation Requirements 14

2.2 Connections 14

3. Mode Input an Function 15

4. Alarm and Error Display 15

4.1 Battery Alarm and Display 15

4.2 Backup Error Display 15

5. System Mode Function 16

5.1 Normal Display 16

5.2 Direct Access Digital Trims 16

5.3 System Mode 17

5.4 Model Selection/Copy Select 18

5.5 Model Name Entry 20

5.6 Model Type Selection 21

5.7 Data Reset 22

5.8 Modulation Select 23

5.9 Data Transfer 24

5.10 Trim Step 25

5.11 Throttle Cut Switch 26

5.12 Wing Type Selection 27

5.13 Aux 2/Spoiler Channel Input Select 30

6. Function Mode

6.2 Servo Reversing 31

6.3 Dual-Rates 33

6.4 Exponential 35

6.5 Sub Trim 38

6.6 Travel Adjust 39

6.7 Elevator-toFlap Mixing 40

6.8 Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing 42

6.9 Mode Function 44

6.10 Snap Roll Function 46

6.11 Differential Aileron Mixing 48

6.12 Landing Attitude 50

6.13 Programmable Mixing 51

6.14 Fail Safe/Hold 55

6.15 Trainer System 59

6.16 Timer Function 62

7. Practical Applications 64

7.1 Programmable Mixing Options 64

8. Data Sheet 65

III. HELICOPTER

1. Transmitter Controls 66

1.1 Control Identification and Location 66

A. Helicopter Version Transmitter 66

1.2 Channel Assignment/Receiver

1.3 Transmitter Rear 68

1.4 Control Stick Length Adjustment 69

1.5 Control Stick Tension Adjustment 69

1.6 DSC Cord 69

1.7 Neck Strap Attachment 70

1.8 Base Loaded Antenna 70

1.9 Frequency Notes/Aircraft Only Frequencies 70

2. Connections 71

2.1 Installation Requirements 71

2.2 Connections 71

3. Key Input and Display 72

4. Alarm and Error Display 72

4.1 Battery Alarm and Display 72

4.2 Backup Error Display 72

5. System Mode 73

5.1 Normal Display 73

5.2 System Mode 73

5.3 Function Mode 74

5.4 Model Selection/Model Copy Select 75

5.5 Model Name Entry 77

5.6 Model Type Selection 78

5.7 Data Rest 79

5.8 Modulation Select 80

5.9 Data Transfer 81

5.10 Trim Step 84

5.11 Throttle Cut Switch Activation 85

5.12 Aux/Gear Function Select 86

5.13 Swashplate Type 87

6. Function Mode 88

6.1 Function Mode 88

6.2 Servo Reversing 89

6.3 Dual-Rates 90

6.4 Exponential 92

6.5 Sub Trim 93

6.6 Travel Adjust 94

6.7 CCPM Swashplate Mixing 95

6.8 Throttle Hold 97

6.9 Throttle Curve 98

6.10 Pitch Curves 101

6.11 Inverted Switch 103

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 2

X-378 MANUAL Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.12 Revolution Mixing 104

6.13 Gyro Gain Function 106

6.14 Programmable Mixing 110

6.15 PCM Fail-Safe/Hold Function 114

6.16 Trainer System 117

6.17 Timer Function 119

7. Data Sheet 121

IV. SAILPLANE

1. Transmitter Controls

1.1 Control Identification and Location 122

A. Glider Version Tx 122

B. Airplane Mode 123

C. Heli Mode 123

1.2 Channel Assignment/Throttle ALT 123

1.3 Transmitter Rear 124

1.4 Control Stick Length Adjustment 125

1.5 Control Stick Tension Adjustment 125

1.6 DSC Cord 125

1.7 Neck Strap Adjustment 126

1.8 Base Loaded Antenna 126

1.9 Frequency Notes/Aircraft Only Frequencies 126

2. Connections

2.1 Installation Requirements 127

2.2 Connections 127

3. Key Input and Display 128

4. Alarm and Error Display 128

4.1 Battery Alarm and Display 128

4.2 Back-Up Error Display 128

5. System Mode 128

5.1 Normal Display 128

5.2 Model Setup Mode 129

5.3 Function Mode 130

5.4 Model Selection/Model Copy Select 131

5.5 Model Name Entry 133

5.6 Model Type Selection 134

5.7 Data Rest 135

5.8 Modulation Select 136

5.9 Data Transfer Function 137

5.10 Trim Step 140

5.11 V-Tail/Dual Flap Wing Mixing 141

5.12 Flap Switch Select Function 143

6. Function Mode

6.1 Function Mode 144

6.2 Servo Reversing 145

6.3 Dual Rates 146

6.4 Exponential 148

6.5 Sub Trim 149

6.6 Travel Adjust 150

6.7 Elevator-to-Flap Mixing 151

6.8 Aileron-to-Flap Mixing 153

6.9 Differential Aileron Mixing 155

6.10 Flap to Elevator Mixing 156

6.11 Flap-to-Aileron Mixing 159

6.12 Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing 162

6.13 Crow/Camber Mixing 164

6.14 Dual-Flap Trim 166

6.15 Programmable Mixing 1-6 167

6.16 Fail-Safe/Hold Function (PCM Only) 171

6.17 Trainer System 175

6.18 Timer Function 177

7. Practical Applications 179

7.1 X-378 Program 179

8. Data Sheets 184

V. IMPORTANT INFORMATION

1. Servo Precautions 185

2. General Notes 185

3. Federal Aviation Administration 186

4. Daily Flight Checks 186

5. Frequency Chart 187

6. Warranty Information 188

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 3

4X-378 MANUAL Introduction

In the beginning of this manual you will find the

specifications for the radio and its various

accessories. In addition, guidelines for the initial

installation of the accessories have been included,

as well as instructions for setting all the functions

and programs of the X-378 to suit your personal

preferences. These features are discussed in the

same order that they will appear on your radio,

as you will see on the accompanying charts. An

explanation of the use and purpose of each feature

is provided, followed by a labeled illustration of its

respective LCD display.

In addition, a step-by-step example clarify the setup

procedure of the feature. Practical applications for

many of the radio’s features enable you to see their

true purpose and additional possibilities. A blank

data sheet has been included at the end of each

section. Once all data has been input for a

particular model, it is highly recommended that you

record it on a copy of the sheet provided. If you

should experience memory loss or battery failure or

want to make changes to the current settings, this

step will save you a great deal of time. Following

the data sheet, you will find information on

precautionary measures and general guidelines for

safe use of your new equipment.

Use of the Instructions with the Radio

While the X-378 has a dedicated or single-use

switch layout, it may be used for multiple model

types. Templates have been provided in this manual

that explain the different switch assignments when

using the transmitter with the various air, heli and

sailplane software.

The computer designed, ergonomically styled

transmitter case ensures a good, comfortable fit in

your hands. The ultra-precision control sticks offer

adjustable spring tensions and length. The throttle

stick offers a ratchet in Airplane configuration for

smooth travel. 8-model memory storage allows

programming of all characteristics of eight separate

helicopters, airplane or gliders; you can program

more than one setup for a single aircraft, allowing

you to instantly change the flight characteristics.

A five-year lithium backup battery prevents loss of

memory in the event that the battery discharges

completely or is removed.

Features include automatic fail-safe "set" and

information update in PCM mode when fail-safe is

used. A programmable trainer function allows the

student to practice individual channels separately.

Direct Servo Control (DSC) permits operation of

all the controls and servos without generating a

radio signal.

CHAPTER 1:USING THIS MANUAL • Introduction

CHAPTER 2:FEATURES

USING THIS MANUAL

X-378 TRANSMITTER

2.1

NER-700 (FM Systems)

The R700’s is a high-performance FM or single-

conversion receiver with 10KHz super narrow band

ABC&W circuitry.

A narrow band ceramic filter for high-signal

selectivity assists in rejecting cross modulations

from other common radio frequencies-e.g., R/C

transmitters, local paging systems. This receiver

features Direct Servo Control (DSC) for control of

surfaces without radio frequency output.

The receiver has low current consumption.

The R700's Slimline design allows it to fit into most

model applications.

R700 RECIEVER

2.2

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 4

X-378 MANUAL Introduction

CHAPTER 3:COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS

537 Servo

• Wide spaced ball bearing for precise movement

of your aircraft control outputs

• A zero deadband amplifier insures accurate

neutral centering

• Low current drain

• Indirect drive feedback potentiometer gives

additional protection from vibration

• 3-pole ferrite cored motor

S537 BALL BEARING SERVOS

2.3

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

3.1

SYSTEM NAME X-378A X-378H

TRANSMITTER BODY NET-K227FS Net-K227HS

TRANSMITTER RF MODULE NET-J72P NET-J72P

RECEIVER R700 (FM) R700 (FM)

CHARGER NEC-221 NEC-222

AIRBORNE BATTERY 600mah 1100mah

SERVOS NES-537X4 NES-537X5

ACCESSORIES Standard Switch Standard Switch

12" Aileron Extension 12" Aileron Extension

Charge Jack Charge Jack

Servo Accys Servo Accys

Hex Wrench Hex Wrench

Instruction Manual Instruction Manual

TYPE AIRPLANE HELICOPTER

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS

3.2

MODEL NUMBER NET-K227FS Net-K227HS

ENCODER 7–channel computer system 7–channel computer system

RF MODULE 72MHz 72MHz

MODULATION PCM (z or s) or PPM PCM (z or s) or PPM

OUTPUT POWER Approximately 750mw Approximately 750mw

CURRENT DRAIN 200mA (70mA with DSC) 200mA (70mA with DSC)

POWER SOURCE 1.2Vx Ni-Cd (9.6V) 600mAh 1.2Vx Ni-Cd (9.6V) 600mAh

OUTPUT PULSE 1000–2000 (1500 Neutral) 1000–2000 (1500 Neutral)

TYPE AIRPLANE HELICOPTER

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 5

6X-378 MANUAL Introduction

SERVO SPECIFICATIONS

3.3

TORQUE (ounce inch) 43 oz/in

SPEED (sec/60°) .25 60°

WEIGHT 1.58

SIZE (in) (W x L x H) 1.52 x 0.73 x 1.32

BB Single

MOTOR 3-Pole Ferrite

TYPE 537

RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS

3.4

MODEL NUMBER R700

TYPE 7 Channel / FM-ABC&W / Micro

FREQUENCY 72MHz

SENSITIVITY (Microseconds) 5 uS minimum

SELECTIVELY 8KHz/ 5 dB

WEIGHT (oz) 1.5

RECEIVER ANTENNA 39“ for all aircraft frequencies

TYPE FM

CHARGER SPECIFICATIONS

3.5

MODEL NUMBER NEC-221 NEC-222

INPUT VOLTAGE AC 100–120V AC 100–120V

OUTPUT CURRENT 50mAh TX/50mAh RX 50mAh TX/120mAh RX

CHARGING TIME 15 Hours 15 Hours

TYPE AIRCRAFT HELICOPTER

AIRBORNE BATTERY PACK

3.6

MODEL NUMBER B600 B1000

VOLTAGE 4.8 V 4.8 V

SIZE (in) (W x L x H) 2.24 x 0.59 x 2.05 2.24 x 0.63 x 1.70

WEIGHT (oz) 3.3 4.9

TYPE AIRCRAFT HELICOPTER

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 6

X-378 MANUAL Introduction

Note:

It is imperative that you fully charge

both the transmitter and the receiver battery

packs prior to each flight. To do so, leave

the charger and batteries hooked up overnight

(16 hours). The first charge should be

approximately 20–24 hours in order to fully

charge both battery packs to peak capacity.

The charger supplied with this system is

designed to recharge your batteries at a rate

of 5mAh for the transmitter and 50mAh for

the receiver battery pack.

Transmitter Only

The center pin on all JR Remote Control Systems is

negative. Therefore, the center pin on all JR chargers

is negative, not positive. This is different from many

other manufacturers' chargers and radio systems.

Beware of improper connections based on "color-

coded" wire leads, as they do not apply in this

instance. You must make sure that the center pin of

your JR transmitter is always connected to the

negative voltage for correct polarity hookup.

Important: Please note that the charging

polarity of the transmitter and receiver

are different.

CHAPTER 4: BATTERY CHARGING

TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER

4.1

The pilot lamps should always be on during the

charging operation. If not, check to make sure that

both the transmitter and receiver are switched off.

Do not use the charger for equipment other than JR.

The charging plug polarity may not be the same.

Equipment damage can result.

Do not use other manufacturers' after-market

accessories that plug into the transmitter's charging

jack. If you do, any damage that results will not be

covered by warranty. If you are unsure of compatabily

issues with your radio, seek expert advice before

doing anything to avoid possible damage.

During the charging operation, the charger's

temperature is slightly elevated. This is normal.

Also, note that the voltage shown on the charger is

higher than the battery in use. This voltage cannot

be measured with a voltmeter. Only current can

be measured with any accuracy using this type

of charger.

Be sure to use the proper charger (120mAh)

when using battery packs of 1000mAh or larger for

your receivers.

CHARGER

4.2

CENTER

PIN IS

NEGATIVE

OUTSIDE IS POSITIVE

RIGHT SIDE OF TRANSMITTER

CHARGER PIGTAIL FOR RECEIVER

CHARGER PIGTAIL FOR TRANSMITTER

BLACK TO POSITIVE

RED TO NEGATIVE

RED–POSITIVE / BROWN–NEGATIVE / ORANGE–SIGNAL

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 7

Your new X-378 system employs four digital trim

levers for unmatched precision and adjustability.

By using the Trim Step function located in the

System mode, the movement of the ADT trims

can be fine tuned as needed to match your

specific application.

The ADT feature is also designed to automatically

save the determined trim values for each model.

When the X-378 is changed between models in the

Model Select function, the digital trim values will

automatically stay with each model, eliminating

the need for a separate trim memory function.

The X-378's digital trims also feature the Direct

Access display function. While at the Normal

display screen, if a trim lever is moved, the screen

will automatically change to display the numeric

value, as well as the graphic position for the trim

being adjusted.

The X-378's digital trims also feature 2-speed

scrolling . When a substantial amount of trim is

required, holding the trim in the desired position

will activate the dual speed scrolling function.

The X-378's Aileron, Elevator, and Rudder trim

levers (also throttle in sailplane mode) feature

an audible center trim beep. This is helpful in

determining the trim levers center position

during flight.

Please also note that unlike conventional

mechanical trim levers, when the X-378 transmitter

is in the off position, no changes can be made to

the trim values during transportation.

The X-378 also features a revolutionary One-Touch

Digital Throttle Trim lever. While in Air or Heli

modes, the X-378 will remember the maximum high

Throttle Trim position (usually idle) set from the

previous flight. At the end of the flight, move the

Throttle Trim to the full low (engine off) position.

For the next flight, by simply pressing the Digital

Throttle Trim up once, the throttle trim value will

automatically move to the position from the

previous flight. Trim value changes can then be

made by moving the throttle trim lever as needed.

The Direct Access Digital Trim function will display

the throttle trim value numerically and also

graphically on the screen automatically each time

the Throttle Trim is moved

This feature is very helpful as once you have set

the correct throttle trim value for a proper idle, the

X-378 will allow the Trim lever to be set back to this

position for each flight, eliminating the need to set

the exact throttle trim value for each flight.

Note: When the X-378 is in the glider

(sailplane) model type, the Digital Throttle

Trim works as a conventional trim lever, which

is the most desirable method in this mode.

ADVANCED DIGITAL TRIMS

4.3

One Touch Digital Throttle Trim Lever (Air and Heli Modes only)

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 8

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

SECTION II • CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS Airplane

CONTROL IDENTIFICATION AND LOCATION

1.1

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT/THROTTLE ALT

1.2

Channel TX Function Airplane Function

1 THRO Throttle Channel

2 AILE Aileron Channel

3 ELEV Elevator Channel

4 RUDD Rudder Channel

5 GEAR Gear Channel

6 AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel

(Flap)

7 AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel

(Spoiler)

Throttle ALT

The Throttle ALT function makes the throttle stick

trim active only when the throttle stick is at less

than half throttle. This gives easy, accurate idle

adjustments without affecting the high throttle

position.

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

Rudder/Throttle

Control Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever

Digital

Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll

Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Gear Switch

Flap Mix Switch

Antenna Carrying

Handle

Flap

Lever

Snap Roll/Timer

Trainer/Button

Throttle Cut

Aileron D/R

Switch

Rudder DR

Switch

Digital

Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/

Elevator

Control

Stick

Increase/

Decrease

Programming

Buttons

Clear Key

LCD Display

Neck Strap Eyelet

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Throttle

Trim Lever

AUX 2

Lever

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 9

10 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS Airplane

Airplane Version Transmitter—Sailplane Mode

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Left Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

(Right Aileron Channel–AILE 2)

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel

(Left Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel

(Right Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

6. AUX 1 Auxiliarty 1 Channel (Pitch)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel

(Gyro Sensitivity)

Airplane Version Transmitter-Heli Mode

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

Spoiler/Rudder

Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Crow Switch

Flap Mixing

Switch Oval Flap Aileron

Trim Lever

Timer/Trainer

Button

Aileron D/R

Switch

Rudder DR

Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Spoiler

Trim Lever

Flapperon

Flap Trim

Lever

Throttle/Rudder

Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever

Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Gear Switch

Flight Mode

Switch Hover Throttle

Lever

Timer/Trainer

Button

Throttle Cut

Button

Rudder DR

Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

Neck Strap Eyelet

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Throttle

Trim Lever

Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Neck Strap Eyelet

Hover Pitch

Lever

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 10

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL

DSC/TRAINER JACK

CHARGING JACK

FOR Ni-Cd BATTERY

ONLY (8N-600)

BATTERY COVER (REMOVED)

CAUTION: THE BATTERY

CONNECTOR IS KEYED SO THAT IT

CAN ONLY BE PLUGGED IN ONE

DIRECTION. DO NOT FORCE.

TRANSMITTER REAR

1.3

ELEVATOR TENSION SCREW RUDDER TENSION SCREW

THROTTLE TENSION SCREW

AILERON TENSION SCREW

Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice

The Federal Communications Commission (FFC) requires that

changes in transmitter frequency must be performed only by an

authorized service technician (Horizon Service Center). Any

transmitter frequency change made by non-certified technician

may result in a violation of the FCC rules.

CHAPTER 1: SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS Airplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 11

12 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

DIRECT SERVO CONTROL (DSC)1.6

CONTROL STICK LENGTH ADJUSTMENT1.4

To adjust the stick length, use the 2mm Allen wrench

(supplied with your X-378 transmitter) to unlock the

set screw. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to

loosen the screw. Then, turn the stick clockwise to

shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen. After the

control stick length has been adjusted to suit your

flying style, tighten the 2mm set screw. If you desire

longer sticks, JR offers a thicker stick (JRPA047) that

is approximately one inch longer than the standard

stick. This stick, crafted from bar stock aluminum, is

available at your local JR dealer.

For proper DSC hook-up and operation:

1. Leave the transmitter power switch in the Off

position. The transmitter will not transmit any radio

frequency (RF) in this position.

2. Plug the (supplied) DSC cord into the DSC port

in the rear of the transmitter.

3. The encoder section of the transmitter will now

be operational and the LCD display will be lit.

4. Plug the other end of the DSC Cord into the receiver

charge receptacle. Turn the switch harness to the On

position.

Note: When you install the charging jack, be

sure to hook the charging jack receptacle

securely into the switch harness charge cord.

Why you should use the DSC function:

1. The DSC enables you to check the control

surfaces of your aircraft without drawing the fully

operational 200mAh from your transmitter

battery pack. Instead, you will only draw 70mAh

when using the DSC function.

2. The DSC function allows you to make final

adjustments to your airplane without transmitting

any radio signals. Therefore, if another pilot is flying

on your frequency, you can still adjust your aircraft

and not interfere with the other pilot’s aircraft.

Note: Under no circumstances should you

attempt to fly your aircraft with the DSC cord

plugged in! This function is for bench-

checking your airplane only.

LOOSEN

TIGHTEN

SET SCREW

A—Charge Cord/DSC Receptacle

B—Switch Harness Lead

C—Charger/DCS Cord

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Airplane

CONTROL STICK TENSION ADJUSTMENT1.5

Remove the Ni-Cd battery and six transmitter back

screws as shown on the previous page. Remove the

transmitter back, being careful not to cause damage

to any components.

Adjust each screw for desired tension (counter-

clockwise to loosen stick feel; clockwise to tighten

stick feel). When adjusting the throttle ratchet

tension, make sure that the adjusting screw does not

touch the PC board after adjustment is complete.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 12

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Airplane

NECK STRAP ATTACHMENT1.7

An eyelet is provided on the face of the X-378

transmitter that allows you to connect a Neck Strap

(JRPA023). This hook has been positioned so that

your transmitter has the best possible balance when

you use the neck strap.

Note: Double-check to ensure that the neck

strap is securely fastened to the transmitter.

BASE LOADED ANTENNA

FREQUENCY NOTES/AIRCRAFT ONLY FREQUENCIES

1.8

An optional base-loaded antenna is available for use

with the X-378 transmitter. It is considerably shorter

than the standard antenna. However, the base

loaded antenna cannot be collapsed for storage in

the side of the transmitter. You must also use an

adaptor (JRPA156) to attach the antenna to your

X-378. The Base Loaded Antenna (JRPA155) is made

of a flexible coil and is covered with a soft plastic

material. Your range will not be affected when using

the base loaded antenna.

1.9

The X-378 transmitter employs a plug-in crystal for

transmitter that is glued in place at the time of

shipment. Per FCC regulation, the transmitter crystal

should only be changed by a certified technician.

Changing of the transmitter crystal by a non-

authorized technician could result in a violation

of FCC rules.

The X-378 can transmit in either Pulse Code

Modulation (PCM) or Pulse Position Modulation

(PPM, commonly referred to as FM).

Be certain to observe the following guidelines:

1. Do not operate your transmitter when another

transmitter is using the same frequency, regardless

of whether the second transmitter is PCM, PPM (FM)

or AM. You can never operate two transmitters on

the same frequency simultaneously without causing

interference to both receivers and crashing both

aircraft.

2. For operation of your X-378 with additional

receivers, you should refer to the receiver

compatibility chart. The chart is located in the

Modulation Selection Section of this manual.

Aircraft-Only Frequencies

JR Transmitters and receivers are available in 72MHz

frequencies in the United States for use with model

aircraft. Employing 72MHz frequencies does not

require a special operator’s license from the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC).

* A chart for all available frequencies is located on

page 185 of this manual.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 13

14 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 2:CONNECTIONS • Airplane

It is extremely important that your radio system be

correctly installed in your model. Here are a few

suggestions on the installation of your JR equipment:

1. Wrap the receiver in protective foam rubber that

is no less than 3/8 inch thick. Secure the foam to

the receiver with #64 rubber bands. This protects

the receiver in the event of a crash or a very hard

landing.

2. The servos should be mounted using rubber

grommets and brass bushings to isolate them from

vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws;

this will negate the vibration absorption effect of the

rubber grommets. The following

diagram will assist you in

properly mounting

your servo.

The brass bushings are pushed from the bottom up

in the rubber grommets. When the servo screw is

tightened securely, it provides the proper security as

well as the proper vibration isolation for your servo.

3. The servos must be able to move freely over their

entire range of travel. Make sure that the control

linkages do not bind or impede the movement of any

of the servos.

4. Mount all switches away from the engine exhaust

and away from any high vibration areas. Make sure

the switch operates freely and is able to operate over

its full travel.

5. Mount the receiver antenna firmly to the airplane

to ensure that it will not become entangled in the

propeller or control surfaces.

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

CONNECTIONS2.2

2.1

4N600

4.8V 600mAh

JAPAN REMOTE CONTROL CO., LTD.

OFF

GEAR

7 CH 72MHz FM SLIMLINE

RECEIVER

ABC&W INTERFERENCE

PROTECTION SYSTEM

BATT

RUDD

ELEV

AILE

THRO

AUX1

RECEIVER BATTERY 4N-600

DELUXE SWITCH HARNESS

(JRPA0001)

CHARGECORD OR

D.S.C. RECEPTACLE

(JRPS024)

CHARGECORD OR D.S.C.

D.S.C.-(JRPA132)

CHARGER-(JRPC221)

R700 RECEIVER

AUXILIARY 2

BATTERY

GEAR

RUDDER

ELEVATOR

AUXILIARY 1

AILERON

THROTTLE

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 14

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 3:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Airplane

BATTERY ALARM AND DISPLAY

CHAPTER 4:ALARM AND ERROR DISPLAY • Airplane

4.1

When the transmitter voltage drops below 9.0 volts

DC, the display flashes “BATT” and an alarm sounds seven times. If you are flying when this occurs, land

immediately.

KEY INPUT AND DISPLAY3

The Function Selection keys are used to move up and

down through the functions.The Channel key is used

to advance the channel or function selected. The

Increase and Decrease keys are used to make changes in

the selected functions.

Function Selection Keys

Down

Channel

Increase

Decrease

Clear/Store

BACKUP ERROR DISPLAY4.2

All preprogrammed data is protected by a five-year

lithium battery that guards against main transmitter

battery failure. Should the lithium battery fail, the

display will indicate ERR1 regardless of the position

of the On/Off switch. If this occurs, it will be

necessary to replace the battery and reprogram all

data. All transmitter programs will return to the

factory default settings, and the data you have input

will be lost. When it becomes necessary to replace

the lithium back-up battery, contact JR Horizon

Service Center. Due to the possibility of extensive

damage caused by improper removal or replacement,

only JR Horizon Service Center is authorized to make

this change.

Press both keys at the

same time to enter or

exit the function mode.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 15

16 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

NORMAL DISPLAY5.1

When the power switch is in the On position, the

display will read as follows:

DIRECT ACCESS DIGITAL TRIMS5.2

The X-378 is equipped with a Direct Access Digital

Trim Value function. When at the normal display,

if a digital trim lever is moved, the screen will

automatically change to show the current trim value

for the channel being adjusted. When the trim is

returned to center, the screen will change back to the

normal display screen after a few seconds.

Current trim value for the channel being adjusted

Modulation

Type Model Type

Model Number

Elevator Trim

Aileron Trim

Rudder Trim

To enter the System mode, press

simultaneously then turn on the

power switch. To enter the Function

model, turn on the power switch,

then press simultaneously.

In the Timer mode, press the

Channel key to start/stop the timer,

and press the Clear key to reset the

timer.

Throttle Trim

Model Name

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 16

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

1. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

2. Move the power switch to the On (upper)

position.

3. Use either the Up or Down key to scroll through the

menu and access the applicable function.

SYSTEM MODE5.3

To enter the System mode, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously, then turn the power

switch to the on position. The display will show the

last active program. Pressing either the Up or Down

key then scrolls through the functions one by one,

according to the system mode flowchart shown to

the right. Once the appropriate function is displayed,

changes can be made by pressing the (+) or (-) keys.

System Mode Flowchart

Information pertaining to each function is explained

on the page listed next to the function name.

Functions will appear in the same order they are

shown on this chart.

Accessing the System Mode

Model

Selection pg. 18

Model Name

Entry pg. 20

Model

Type pg. 21

Data

Reset pg. 22

Modulation

Selection pg. 23

Data

Transfer pg. 24

Trim

Step pg. 25

Throttle Cut

Switch Activation

pg. 26

Wing

Type pg. 27

Spoiler Channel

Input Selection

pg. 30

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 17

18 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CLR

Accessing the Model Selection Function

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

The X-378 system offers memory for eight completely

separate models. Therefore, it is possible to have a

mixture of helicopter, airplane and glider setups

retained in memory. It is also recommended that the

Model Name Entry function be used in conjunction

with each model setup. Another very useful function

of the Model Selection function is the ability to set

one aircraft up several different ways. This is helpful

when multi-task performance is desired.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Model should be flashing on the right top portion

of the LCD. If not, press the Up or Down key until

“Model” is displayed and flashing.

3. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will select among each

of the eight models available. Notice that as each

model is selected, its name appears in the left

portion of the LCD.

4. To access the Copy Selection function, press the

Channel key.

5. To access the Model Name Entry function, press

the Up key.

6. Once the desired model is displayed on the left,

pressing the Down and Channel keys simultaneously will

exit the Model Selection function and establish the

model displayed as the new current model.

Note: When changing from one model type

to another, it is not necessary to use the Type

Selection function. This is done automatically

by the computer.

MODEL SELECTION/COPY SELECT

5.4

“Model” flashing indicates

Model Select function

Model Selection

Model Name

Spoiler Channel

Input Select

Copy

Selection

Model Name Entry

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 18

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Accessing the Copy Selection Function

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

CLR

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys,

move the transmitter’s power switch to the

On position.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until "Model"

appears flashing on the top right side of the LCD.

3. The number that appears below the flashing

Model is the current model. This is important to note

as only the current model will be the copied or

"from" model. It is imperative to retrieve the proper

current model prior to initiating the copy sequence.

Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the desired

model to be copied.

4. Next, press the Channel key once. The word "Copy"

will appear at the top left of the screen indicating

that the Copy function has been selected.

5. The large number (1-8) at the bottom center of the

LCD indicate the accepting model.

6. Now press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the

accepting model number.

Note: Always make sure that the accepting

model is either free of input or one which

you no longer want to retain in your

transmitter’s memory. Once the copying

process has been completed, the information

of the accepting model is lost and the

current model is input as the new data.

7. Once the desired accepting model is selected,

press the Clear key to complete the Copy Selection

function. The model number at the bottom of the

screen will flash several times, indicating that the

model copy function was successful. The “from”

(template) model’s name and data will now replace

that of the accepting model.

8. To access the Spoiler Channel Input Select

function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Model Naming function, press the

Up key.

10. To exit the Copy Selection function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

The Copy Selection function enables you to copy all

of the settings of the current model to another

model within the same transmitter. This is very

useful when setting up one aircraft several different

ways or when trying an alternative setup of your

current model.

Model number to be copied

Press Clear to copy current model to

model number shown at the bottom of

the LCD screen.

Copy Selection

Model number to be copied to

Model Naming

Press at Model

Select function

to access Copy

function.

Press Increase or

Decrease to

select model

number to be

copied to.

Spoiler Channel Input Select

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 19

20 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Accessing the Model Name Entry Function

CLR

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

The X-378 allows a 3-digit name to be input for each

of the eight models available. The current model will

be displayed in the Normal display when the timer is

not active. You may also find this useful to identify

different aircraft setups.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On (upper) position to enter

the Model Setup mode.

2. Use the Model Selection function to select the

model you want to name. (Please refer to the Model

Selection section at this time.)

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the first digit

of the model to be named is flashing on the left

portion of the LCD.

4. The current name will be displayed in the left

portion of the LCD. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will

select the first alphanumeric character.

Note: The character being selected will flash.

5. Press the Channel key to advance the character

selection to the next character.

6. Repeat this procedure until all three characters are

selected.

7. To access the Model Selection function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Type Selection function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Model Name Entry function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

MODEL NAME ENTRY

5.5

Model Number

character

Select

characters Clear current

character

Flashing first digit indicates

Model Naming function and

current character to be

changed

Model Type

Model Select

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 20

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

Accessing the Type Selection Function

The X-378 is capable of performing as a helicopter,

airplane or sailplane radio with full functions for each.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down keys until “Acro,” “Heli,”

or “Glid” is displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

3. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the

type of model.

4. To access the Model Name Entry function, press

the Down key.

5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Up key.

6. To exit the Type Selection function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

MODEL TYPE SELECTION

5.6

CLR

Model Type

Data Reset

Model Naming Press to change

model type.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 21

22 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Press the Up or Down key until “RESET” appears in

the center of the LCD display. Be sure that the model

selected is the model you want to reset by checking

the number at the right side of the display.

3. To reset data, press the Clear key.

4. To access the Type Selection function, press the

Down key.

5. To access the Modulation Selection function, press

the Up key.

6. To exit the Data Reset function, press both the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Data Reset Function

The Data Reset function permits you to reset all the

functions and settings for the current model to

factory conditions. Resetting does not affect the data

already programmed for other models. Be sure to

confirm that you need to reset the data of the

currently indicated model in order to prevent

accidental loss of your valuable data.

DATA RESET

5.7

Model number to be reset

Modulation Select

Model Type Press to Data Reset

current model.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 22

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move

the power switch to the On position to access the

System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPCM,”

“ZPCM,” or “PPM” appears at the top of the LCD.

3. To change among the modulation types, press

either the (+) or (-) keys.

Note: When the Data Reset function is used,

the X-378 retains the current modulation

selected for each model. This means that the

modulation type does not change.

4. Pressing the Clear key will also reset the modulation

selection to the factory preset S-PCM.

5. To access the Data Reset function, press the

Down key.

6. To access the Data Transfer function, press the Up key.

7. To exit the Modulation Selection function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Note: In the normal display, the selected

modulation type will appear in the middle of

the LCD.

Accessing the Modulation Select Function

The Modulation Selection function enables your

X-378 to transmit to a variety of JR receivers that are

already, or may soon be, in existence. You can select

from either of two types of PCM, Z-PCM or S-PCM,

depending on the Central Processing Unit (CPU)

within your receiver or from linear PPM (Pulse

Position Modulation [FM]).

Refer to the receiver compatibility chart below for

the correct modulation.

MODULATION SELECT

5.8

TX Modulation Compatible Receivers # of Channels &

Brief Description

PPM NER-226 6 (micro)

PPM NER-228 8

PPM (FM) NER-327x 7

PPM (FM) NER-527x 7 (micro)

PPM (FM) NER-529x 9 (micro)

PPM (FM) NER-549 9

PPM NER-600 6

PPM NER-610M 6

PPM NER-700M 7

TX Modulation Compatible Receivers # of Channels &

Brief Description

Z-PCM NER-236 6 (micro)

Z-PCM NER-627XZ or

627

“G” series

Z-PCM NER-J329P 9

Z-PCM NER-910XZ 10

S-PCM NER-955 10

S-PCM NER-D945 10

S-PCM NER-649S 9

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

CLR

Modulation

Data Transfer

Data Reset Press to change

modulation. Press to reset to

SPCM modulation.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 23

24 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1. Both transmitters: With the main power switch off,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

while turning the power switch on to enter the

System mode. The word “TXDSC” will be displayed

and flashing.

2. Press the Channel key to select Transmit (TXDSC) or

Receive (RXDSC) modes.

3. Insert the Trainer cord into each transmitter, the

letters DSC will be removed from the screen.

4. Turn off the power switch on each transmitter. The

screen will then change to read either “TXOUT” or

“RXSEL”, depending if transmit or receive modes

were selected.

Note: It is also possible to access the Data

Transfer function as follows:

5. With the main TX power switch off, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously while inserting the

trainer cord into the DSC jack of both transmitters.

(The transmitters will now be in System mode

automatically)

6. Press the Channel key to select transmit (TX) or

receive (RX) modes.

7. Both transmitters: In the System mode, press the

Up or Down keys until the words “TXOUT” appears on

the screen. This is the Data Transfer program.

8. Receiving Mode Transmitter (TX to receive

programming): Press the Channel key until the screen

reads “RXSEL.” The word “MODEL” will begin

flashing at the top right portion of the LCD directly

over the current model number selected.

9. Select the receiving model number by pressing the

(+) and (-) keys.

Transmitting Data

10. Press the Clear key to activate the receiving stand-

by mode. The word “RX IN” will now be indicated on

the screen.

Transfer Procedure

The X-378’s Data Transfer function allows for a model

from one X-378 transmitter to be sent to another

X378 transmitter by using a JR Trainer Cord (JRPA130

sold separately).

Transmitting Transmitter: It will first be necessary

to select the desired model (1-8) to be transferred to

the receiving transmitter. Access the Model Select

function and select the desired model number to be

transferred (see section 6.1 for information).

DATA TRANSFER

5.9

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

Indicates that the DSC cord

needs to be inserted, and the

TX power switch needs to be

turned off

Trim Step

Modulation

Select

Press to select Transmit (TX)

or Receive (RX ) modes

Transmit Mode

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 24

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

The Trim Step function allows the user to increase or

decrease the coarseness of the servo movement as

compared to the steps or beeps of the digital trim.

The total servo trim movement remains the same,

(approx. 30degree) regardless of the trim step rate

selected(1~10). The factory default setting for the

trim step function is 4, which means that for each

step (beep) of the digital trim, the servo will move in

digital increments of 4. In other words, if a finer trip

step value of 1 is selected, the servo will move in a

digital increment of 1for each step (beep) of the

digital trim. If a more coarse trim value of 10 is

selected, the servo will more in a digital increment

of 10 for each step (beep) of the digital trim lever.

TRIM STEP

5.10

CLR

Throttle Cut

Data Transfer

Press Channel to select

channel to be adjusted

(Throttle, Aileron, Elevator,

Aux 2 Lever, Flap Level).

Press Clear to reset to the

factory default (4) position.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to increase or

decrease the trim

step rate.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 25

26 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

This is the function to assign Throttle Cut switch to

the push button located on upper front of the

transmitter. In the System mode, select the Throttle

Cut Switch function (CUT) by using Up or Down keys,

and press (+) or (-) keys to select the function on or

off. The Throttle Cut function is designed to return

the throttle trim to the lowest position instantly and

keep this position while the button is pressed. This

feature is used to “cut” or stop the engine without

changing the position of digital throttle trim.

THROTTLE CUT SWITCH ACTIVATION

5.11

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

AUX 2 Switch Selection

Trim Step Press the (+) or (-)

keys to turn the

Throttle Cut function

on and off.

Press Clear to reset to the

factory off position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 26

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CLR

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

The purpose of the Wing Mixing or Wing Type

function is to eliminate mechanical or pro-

grammable mixes that would otherwise be necessary

for the proper flight of certain styles of aircraft. There

are three wing types from which to choose; select the

one that will best suit your R/C aircraft. They are as

follows: Normal, Flapperon, and Elevon (Delta). Each

of the Wing Type selections will be covered below.

This is the first wing type selection that appears on

your LCD display. Use this wing type with common

aircraft that utilize only one servo for both of the

control surfaces. Normal is the factory default setting

for the Wing Mixing function. This means that if data

reset is performed, your radio will return to this

wing type selection. Your X-378 transmitter will

also return to the normal wing mixing type if the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium battery

are both removed from the transmitter.

1. While the Down and Channel buttons are pressed,

move the power switch to the On position to access

the System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until "WING"

appears at the left portion of the LCD. The current

wing type will be displayed on the upper center

portion LCD: NORM-Normal; FLPER-Flapperon;

DELT-Delta (Elevon).

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to select the desired

wing type.

4. To access the Throttle Cut function, press the

Down key.

5. To access the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Select

function, press the Up key.

6. To exit the Wing Mixing function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Note: There are not any special receiver port

connections to be made when the Normal

Wing Type Selection is selected.

WING TYPE SELECTION

5.12

Wing type

Throttle Cut

Aux2/Spoiler Channel

Input Select Press the (+) or (=) keys

to change the wing type.

Press the Clear key to reset to the

factory default position (NORM).

Normal Wing Type Selection

Accessing the Normal Wing Mixing Selection

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 27

28 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1. While the Down and Channel buttons are pressed,

move the power switch to the On position to access

the System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down keys until "WING"

appears in the left portion of the LCD. The current

wing type will be displayed on the Upper center

portion of the LCD: Norm-Normal; FLPER-Flapperon;

DELT-Delta (Elevon).

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to access the

Flapperon (FLPR) Wing Type Selection.

Note: For Flapperon, one servo must be used

for each aileron control surface.

4. Plug the left wing aileron servo into the Auxiliary 1

(AUX 1) port of your JR receiver. Connect the right

aileron servo into the aileron port (AILE) of your

receiver.

5. Check to make sure that the wing servos move

in the proper direction. For a right turn, the right

aileron should raise while the left aileron lowers

simultaneously. For a left turn, the opposite is true;

the left aileron should rise while the right aileron

drops. If your servos are not moving in the direction

just described, use the Servo Reversing function to

reverse the travel direction of the servo(s) that are

moving improperly. Refer to the Servo Reversing

section for information on how to reverse the travel

direction.

Note: Each servo's travel direction is

adjusted individually through the Servo

Reversing function.

Once the servos achieve their proper travel direction,

adjust their travel volume, dual rates, sub-trim and

aileron differential.

Note: The applicable channel's left or right

travel adjustment may be made individually

by accessing the Travel Adjust function. Refer

to the Travel Adjust section of this manual

for more information. The fine adjustments

of your aileron controls should be made in

the Dual-Rate function. Refer to the Dual-

Rate section for information on how to do

so. You can also adjust the neutral point of

your aileron servos individually through the

use of the Sub-Trim function. Refer to the

Sub-Trim section of this manual for more

information.

6. The flap lever located on the right face of the

transmitter controls the aileron movements as flaps.

Note: Differential is offered for the Flapperon

function of your X-378. For more information,

please refer to the Differential section of this

manual.

8. To access the Throttle Cut function, press the

Down key.

9. To access the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Select

function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Wing Mixing function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing and Utilizing the Flapperon Wing Type Selection

Flapperon Wing Type Selection

Connect this servo

to the aileron part of

the receiver.

Connect this servo

to the AUX 1 part

of the receiver.

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

Flapperons allow you to use the existing ailerons as

flaps. The ailerons can be raised or lowered in unison as flaps, yet still remain fully operational as

the ailerons of your R/C airplane.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 28

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

Delta Wing Type Selection

Delta or Elevon is the final Wing Mixing selection in

your X-378. This style of aircraft also employs two

wing servos. However, there is not an elevator

present. Instead, at an elevator stick input, the two

wing servos function in conjunction with one another

to create an up/down movement of the aircraft. The

wing itself functions as if it were the elevator. Also,

when an aileron control is given, the two wing servos

move in opposition to one another to function as

ailerons.

1. While the Down and Channel keys are pressed, move

the power switch to the On position to access the

System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until "WING"

appears in the left portion of the LCD. The current

wing type will be displayed on the upper center

portion of the LCD: NORM-Normal; FLPER-

Flapperon; DELTA-Delta (Elevon).

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to select the Delta

(Elevon) Wing Type function.

Note: With the Delta function, one servo

must be used for each elevon, i.e., a separate

servo for each wing half.

4. Plug the left elevon servo to the aileron (AILE) of

your JR receiver. Connect the right elevon servo into

the elevator (ELEV) port of your receiver.

5.Check to make sure that the servos move in the

proper direction. When an input is given from the

elevator stick, they should move in unison to achieve

the proper up/down elevator command. If your

servos do not move in the proper direction as

described above, use the Servo Reversing function

to reverse the travel direction.

Note: Each servo's direction is adjusted

individually through the Servo Reversing

function. For more information, refer to the

Servo Reversing section in this manual.

6. Once the servos have achieved their proper travel

direction, adjust their travel direction, travel volume,

dual rates, sub-trim and aileron differential.

Note: The applicable channel's left or right,

up or down travel adjustments can be made

individually. Refer to the Travel Adjust

section in this manual for more information.

7. Relative to the note above, each servo's travel

volume is automatically reduced to 75% of the

operating range. This is to ensure that the servo

does not operate beyond its capabilities. Failure to

observe extreme caution when adjusting the value

for the elevon servos may result in damage to the

servos by over traveling.

Note: Fine adjustments of the elevons

should be made in the Dual-Rate function.

For more information, refer to the Dual-Rate

section in this manual. You can also adjust

the neutral point of your elevon servos

individually. To do so, use the Sub-Trim

function as described in the Sub-Trim

section of this manual. Differential is offered

for the elevon function of your XP-783. For

more information, refer to the Differential

Aileron Mixing section of this manual.

9. To access the Throttle Cut function, press the

Down key.

10. To access the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Select

function, press the Up key.

11. To exit the Wing Mixing function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Connect this servo

to the elevator part

of the receiver.

Connect this servo

to the aileron port of

the receiver.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 29

30 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

AUX 2/SPOILER CHANNEL INPUT SELECT

5.13

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Airplane

Accessing the Spoiler Channel Selection Function

The purpose of the Aux 2/Spoiler Channel Input

Selection function is to assign the activation device

for the AUX 2 channel. The Lever provides

proportional control, while the switch allows On/Off

function of the AUX 2 channel.

Note: If the spoiler is coupled to the landing

system, the spoiler lever or switch will not

operate the spoiler's channel and "LAND" will

appear in this program.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the

System Mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until "AUX 2"

appears at the upper right portion of the LCD.

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to assign the

desired switch (LEVRG or MIX SW)

4. To access the Wing Type function, press the

Down key.

5. To access the Model Select function, press the

Up key.

6. To exit the Aux2/Spoiler Channel Input Selection

function, press the Down and Channel keys

simultaneously.

CLR

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (LEVRG)

Switch selected (LEVRG

or MIX SW)

Model Select

Wing Type Press the (+) or (-) key to

select the desired switch

to be assigned.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 30

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Accessing the Mode Function

To enter the Function mode, switch the transmitter

power switch to the On position. Press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously, and the display will

show the last active program. Pressing either the Up

or Down key then scrolls through the functions one by

one, according to the Function Mode Flowchart

shown on the right. Once the appropriate function is

displayed, changes can be made by pressing the (+)

or (-) keys. To select another channel of a particular

function, press the Channel key. If you transfer to a

different function that is channel selectable, the

display will show the same channel. For example, if

you are adjusting the dual rate of the elevator and

you change to the Exponential function, the channel

remains elevator. The Function mode is the most

often used system to input data.

Function Mode Flowchart

Information pertaining to each function is explained

on the page listed next to the function name.

Functions will appear in the same order they are

shown on this chart.

1. Move the power switch to the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the

menu and access the applicable function.

FUNCTION MODE

6.1

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Servo Reversing

pg.32

Dual Rate pg.33

Exponential pg.35

Sub-Trim pg.38

Travel Adjust

pg.39

Elevator-to-

Flap Mixing pg. 40

Aileron-to-

Rudder Mixing

pg. 42

Landing Mode

pg. 44

Snap Roll

Function pg.46

Differential

Aileron Mixing

pg. 48

Flap Lever

Adjustment

pg.

Programmable

Mixing pg. 50

Fail-Safe (only

visible when PCM

Modulation is

selected) pg. 52

Trainer Function

pg. 59

Timer Function

pg. 62

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 31

32 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Accessing the Reverse Switch Function

The Reverse Switch function is an electronic means

of reversing the throw of a given channel (servo). All

seven channels of the X-378 offer reversible servo

direction. This will ease setup during the servo

installation into your aircraft.

1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “REV.”

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Using your transmitter’s control sticks, switches

and potentiometers, move the control surfaces of

your aircraft. Note the travel direction of each of the

corresponding control surfaces.

5. After you have determined which channel(s) need

to have the throw directions reversed, use the

Channel key to call up the appropriate channel.

6. Press either the (+) or (-) keys to change the travel

direction of the servo. Pressing the Clear key returns

the travel direction to Normal.

7. You can observe the change in the travel direction

by moving the appropriate control at this time.

8. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Dual Rate function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Reverse Switch function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

SERVO REVERSING

6.2

Channel to be

adjusted

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to change the

servo direction.

Press Channel to change

to the desired channel to

be adjusted.

Press Clear to reset

to the factory normal

direction.

THRO: Throttle

AILE: Aileron

ELEV: Elevator

RUDD: Rudder

GEAR: Retract

Landing Gear

FLAP: Flap (AUX 1)

SPOI: Spoiler

Dual-Rate Function

Timer Function

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 32

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Accessing the Dual-Rate Function

Dual rates are available for the aileron, elevator and

rudder channels of your R/C aircraft. There is also an

automatic dual rate setting to link your aileron,

elevator, and rudder dual rates to the flight model

switch. This automatic Dual-Rate function is

discussed in a separate section that follows. Dual

rates may be defined as the ability to vary the travel

or throw rate of a servo from a switch. Due to the

differing travel rates, you will find that the sensitivity

of the control either increases or decreases

accordingly. A higher rate, or travel, yields a higher

overall sensitivity. You may find it easier to think

of the Dual-Rate function as double-rates or half-

rates.The Dual-Rate function works in conjunction

with the Exponential function to allow you to

precisely tailor your control throws. You may want to

consult the section defining exponential for further

information.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

on position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “D/R” appears

in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

(aileron, elevator, rudder or automatic dual rates)

appears.

5. Select the switch position for which you want

to adjust the rate. The number to the upper right of

the current rate value on the display indicates the

current position of the Dual-Rate switch for the

channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or a 1 will

be shown, corresponding to the position of the

switch. To select the opposite switch position, move

the appropriate Dual-Rate switch to the opposite

position. The number that appears above the current

rate value reflects the change.

6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch

position that you have just selected. To decrease the

throw rate, press the (-) key. To increase the throw

rate, press the (+) key. As stated previously, the

adjustable rate is from 0-125% for each switch

position and channel.

DUAL RATES

6.3

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Channel to

be adjusted

Exponential

Servo Reversing

Press Channel to select

Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,

or Auto D/R to be adjusted.

Press (+) or (-)

to increase or

decrease D/R

values.

Channel to be

adjusted D/R

switch position.

(0 or 1)

Press Clear to reset

to factory default

settings.(100%)

The amount of travel is adjustable from 0-125% in 1%

increments. The factory setting, or default value, for

both the 0 and 1 switch positions is 100%. Either

switch position may be selected as the low or high

rate by placing the switch in the desired position and

adjusting the value accordingly.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 33

34 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) •

Accessing the Dual-Rate Function (continued)

Note: You can observe the servo changes by

moving the respective stick while increasing

or decreasing the values. The control changes

accordingly. To clear the dual rate for the respective

channel and switch position, press the Clear

key. After the dual rates have been dialed in

to your satisfaction, we suggest that you begin

to adjust the exponential values. Refer to the

Exponential section for more information.

7. To access the Servo Reversing function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Exponential function, press the

Up key.

9. To exit the Dual-Rate function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Automatic Dual-Rate

If the Automatic Dual-Rate function AUTO is active

(on), when switching the flight mode switch, aileron, elevator and rudder channel Dual-Rate values are

switched to preset values settled by position 1.

Press Clear to return to the

factory default setting (off).

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to turn the

Auto D/R function

on or off.

To access this function, move to the D/R (Dual-Rate)

screen, and press the Channel button until the word

“AUTO” appears at the top center of the screen, with a

small box with the number 1 to the far left. This would

indicate the Auto D/R function for Flight mode 1.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the function on or off.

Repeat this procedure for flight modes 2 and

Hold (HO).To confirm that the Auto D/R is

functioning, simply move the flight mode switch

while at any of the normal D/R channel screens. If

the Auto D/R is functioning, the screen will indicate

D/RAT, and the D/R switch position at the far right

of the screen will change from 0 to 1 as the switch

is moved.

Flight mode position to be adjusted

Condition (off or on)

Flight mode position to

be adjusted

Exponential

Servo Reversing

Press Channel to

select the desired

flight mode to adjust

(1,2 or HO).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 34

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Accessing the Exponential Function

Programmable exponential adjustments are offered

on the aileron, elevator, and rudder channels of your

R/C aircraft. Exponential is a function that allows you

to tailor the response rate of the stick controls. The

purpose of exponential is to reduce the sensitivity in

the middle portion of stick movement, while still

allowing full travel at the end of the stick movement.

In other words, the end result (travel) remains the

same, although exponential changes the rate at

which it achieves this travel.

The adjustable range of the Exponential Function is

from 0-100%. Zero percent (0%) is linear stick control

which means that the response rate is equal

throughout the stick control. 100% is full

exponential. The larger the exponential value, the

less servo action or sensitivity you will notice around

the neutral setting.

Note: The Exponential function operates in

conjunction with the Dual-Rate function. It is

imperative to understand the Dual-Rate

function prior to adjusting the exponential

values. Exponential may be selected for

either the high or low rate or both.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

access the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “EXP” (Exponential)

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

(aileron, elevator, rudder or AUTO) appears.

5. Select the switch position for which you want to

adjust the exponential rate. The number directly

above the exponential value on the display indicates

the current position of the Dual-Rate switch for the

channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or 1 will be

shown, corresponding to the position of the switch. To

select the opposite switch position, move the

appropriate Dual-Rate or Flight mode switch to the

opposite position. The number that appears directly

above the Exponential value will reflect the change.

6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch

position that you have just selected. To increase the

exponential rate, press the (+) key. The adjustable

rate is from linear (0%) to100% for each switch

position and channel.

Note: Exponential is an acquired feel. It may

take several test flights to achieve the proper

amount of exponential that fits your flying style.

8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Exponential Function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

EXPONENTIAL6.4

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Press Clear to reset

values to the factory

default position.

Channel to

be adjusted

Sub-Trim function

Dual-Rate

function

Press to select Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,

or AUTO position to be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

Increase or decrease the

Exponential values, or to

activate or inhibit the

Exponential function in the

Auto Dual-Rate modes.

Dual-Rate switch

position to be

adjusted

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 35

36 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate

When the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate

function is active, the throttle stick position will

automatically switches among the rudder

exponential rates that you have selected in the

exponential section listed above. This means that, as

you advance or pull back the throttle stick, the

rudder exponential rates automatically change.

When the throttle stick is moved anywhere from low

to approximately 70% of full travel, the low (position

0) rudder exponential rates are active; once the

throttle is fully advanced, high (position 1) rudder

exponential will automatically return.

You will find that the automatic rudder exponential

rate is very useful in overcoming special flying

problems. The idea is to have less rudder sensitivity

at high throttle positions because the rudder is more

effective at higher speeds. Conversely, it is more

efficient to have more rudder sensitivity at lower

speeds because the rudder is not as effective. The

Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate function can

also be used in the opposite manner to reduce the

sensitivity of the rudder for takeoffs with models that

have sensitive steering.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

On/Off

Sub Trim

Dual-Rate

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to turn the AUTO

function on and off.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (Off).

Press Channel to access

AUTO rate function from

exponential screen.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 36

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On

(upper) position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "D/R" appears

in the upper center portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until "AUTO" is displayed.

5. Pressing either the (+) or (-) keys changes the

automatic rudder Exponential rate from off to on. To

return the auto rudder exponential rate to the "Off"

position, press the (+) or (-) keys one more time or

press the Clear key.

6. When the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate

function is active, "EXPAT" will be displayed on the

rudder exponential rate display.

7. The exponential rate value selected for switch

position 0 will be the value used for low throttle stick

operation (Up to approximately 70%); the

exponential rate value selected for switch position 1

will be the exponential value used when the throttle

stick is in the high (full) position.

8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the

Down key.

9. To access the Sub Trim function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rate

function, press the Down and Channel keys

simultaneously.

Note: In order for the Automatic Rudder

Exponential Rate function to operate, the

rudder dual rate switch must be in the 0

position. Moving the dual rate switch to the

1 position negates the operation of the

automatic rudder exponential rate and

defaults the rate to the value for switch 1.

To confirm that the Auto Rudder Exponential Rate is

functioning, simply move the throttle stick while at

the EXPAT screen. If the Auto Rudder Exponential is

functioning, the exponential rate switch position at

the far right of the screen will change from 0 to 1 as

the throttle stick is moved.

Adjusting the Automatic Rudder Exponential Rates

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 37

38 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

The Sub-Trim Adjustment function allows you to

electronically fine-tune the centering of your servos.

Individually adjustable for all seven channels with a

range of ±125% (+/-30 degrees servo travel), the sub-

trims can be set for the same neutral settings for

each model stored in the transmitter’s memory.

The sub trim functions provides precise servo arm

neutral positioning if rotating the servo arm will

not allow the desired servo arm position.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. To Access the Function mode, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SUBTRIM”

appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

appears.

5. Press the (+) or (-) key to establish the desired

amount and direction of Sub-Trim.

Note: A (+) or (-) symbol appears to the left of

the sub trim value to indicate the direction of

Sub-Trim input.

Caution: Do not use excessive sub-trim

adjustments since it is possible to overrun

your servo’s maximum travel if it is off-center.

Remember that it is a trim convenience

function. It is not intended to take the place

of the proper mechanical trim adjustments

that are necessary on any R/C model. An

offset servo will also produce a

differential effect.

6. To access the Exponential function, press the

Down key.

7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the Up key.

8. To exit the Sub-Trim function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing Sub-Trim Adjustment Function

SUB-TRIM6.5

Press Clear to reset to the

factory default settings (0%).

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase or decrease

the Sub-Trim value.

Channel to

be adjusted

Sub-Trim Value

Travel Adjust

Exponential

Press to select desired

channel to be adjusted (1-7).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 38

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

The purpose of Travel Adjust, also known as endpoint

adjustment or adjustable travel volume, is to offer

you precise servo control deflection in either

direction of servo operation. The X-378 offers travel

adjust for all seven channels. The Travel Adjust range

is from 0-150% (0 degrees to 60 degrees) from

neutral, or center, and it can be adjusted for each

direction individually. The factory default (Data

Reset) value is 100% for each direction of servo travel.

TRAVEL ADJUST

6.6

Accessing the Travel Adjust Function

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRAVL”

appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

appears.

5. Move the appropriate control stick (lever, switch,

etc) to the right or left of center to the direction of

travel you want to adjust. An arrow to the right of the

travel adjust value will reflect the current position to

be adjusted. Using our example above, if the aileron

stick is moved to the left, a left-facing arrow will

appear to the left of the travel adjust value on the

LCD screen.

6. After the control stick or switch is placed in the

direction of travel to be adjusted, press the (+) or (-)

key until the proper amount of servo travel is shown

on the lower right side of the LCD. Press the (+) key

to increase the amount of servo travel. Press the (-)

key to decrease the amount of servo travel.

7. Follow the same procedure for the remaining

channels.

8. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Throttle Hold (or CCPM Mix if

activated) function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Travel Adjust function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

CLR

Press Clear to reset to factory

default settings (100%).

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to increase or

decrease the Sub

Trim values.

Travel direction to be

adjusted (left/right,

up/down, etc)

Channel to be adjusted

Press Channel to select

the desired channel to

be adjusted.

Elevator to

Flap Mixing Sub-Trim

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 39

40 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Press either the Up or Down key until "ELEV-FLAP"

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

Note: If the Flap Mixing switch is not in the

uppermost position, the position indicator

will read "OFF". The flap mixing switch must

be in the upper (elevator) mix position in order

to make adjustments to the flap mixing value.

3. Move the elevator stick in the direction you want

to mix with flaps.

Note: The position indicator will reflect this

change by replacing the up arrow with a down

arrow or vice-versa. A down arrow indicates up

elevator, and an up arrow indicates down

elevator (arrow position is indicating stick

position, not elevator direction.

5. Press the (+) or (-) key to increase or decrease the

amount of flaps to be mixed. If you want to reverse

the flap travel, press the Clear key, bringing the

mixing value to the factory default (0%), and increase

the value using the opposite key (+) or (-) from the

key originally selected.

6. Once you have adjusted the first mixing position

(up or down), place the elevator stick in the opposite

direction and follow Step 5 above to adjust the

second elevator mixing value.

7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Up key.

9.To exit the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Elevator to Flap Mixing Functiion

CLR

When this system is active and a value of flaps is

input, the flaps will be deflected each time the

elevator stick is used. The actual flap movement is

adjustable for both up and down elevator. The most

frequently used application is up elevator/down flaps

and down elevator/up flaps. When used in this

manner, the aircraft pitches much more quickly than

normal. The upper-most position of the Flap Mixing

switch activates the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing circuitry.

ELEVATOR-TO-FLAP MIXING

6.7

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (0%).

Up/Down arrows change when

the elevator stick is moved, and

indicate current position to be

adjusted

Current mixing

value

Current mix switch position (Up=ON, center or

low position displays OFF)

Aileron-to-Rudder

Mixing Travel Adjust

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase or decrease

the mixing value for

each position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 40

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Note: Only the elevator input indicated by

the LCD will be cleared. For example, if the

up arrow were displayed and CLR were

pushed, the down arrow value would still be

retained by the transmitter. In order to

change elevator operating direction, move

the elevator control stick in the direction you

want to mix with flaps. Using our example,

we would input down elevator. The down

arrow would be displayed at the lower left

portion of the LCD. Our mixing value would

also change to reflect our input. If the Flap

Mixing switch is not in the uppermost

position, the position indicator will change

from “On’’ to “Off’’. This indicates that the

Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is not

currently active. Although the current mixing

value will still be displayed, it will not be

possible to alter this value until the mix

switch is returned to the on position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 41

42 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CLR

This form of mixing is designed so that when input

to the aileron stick is given, the rudder servo will also

move, eliminating the need to coordinate these

controls manually.

When adjusting, if an opposite mixing direction of

the rudder servo is required, simply press the (+) or

(-) keys to change the mixing value from a (+) to (-)

or a (-) to a (+). This will reverse the mixing direction

of the rudder from its original direction. The switch

used to activate this mix can also be selected as

explained below. The factory default mix switch for

the Aileron-to-Rudder mix function is Rudder

D/R/Mix switch located at the upper right side of the

transmitter.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Press either the Up or Down key until "AILE-RUDD"

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

Note: If the current mixing switch is not in the

on position, the position indicator will read

"OFF." The current mixing switch must be in

the On position in order to make adjustments

to the Aileron- to-Rudder mixing value.

4. With the current mix switch on, press the (+) or (-)

key to increase or decrease the amount of rudder to

be mixed with aileron. If you want to reverse the

Rudder Mix direction, press the Clear key, bringing

the mixing value to the factory default (0%), and

increase the value using the opposite key (+) or (-)

from the key originally selected.

5. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,

press the Down key.

6. To access the Landing Mode function, press the

Up key.

7. To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Function

AILERON-TO-RUDDER MIXING

6.8

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Press the Clear key to reset to

the factory default position.

Mixing switch position Mixing Value

Landing Mode

Elevator-to-Flap Mixing

Press Channel to

access the mixing

switch assignment

function.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to adjust the

mixing value, or to

select the mix switch

assignment.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 42

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing program can be

turned on and off using several different assignable switch options. The switches that can be selected are

shown to the right of the LCD display below.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "AILE-

RUDD" appears in the center portion of your LCD.

4. Press the Channel key to access the switch

assignment function.

5. Press the (+) or (-) key to select the desired

switch/function to activate the Aileron-to-Rudder

Mixing function.

6. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,

press the Down key.

7. To access the Landing Mode function, press the

Up key.

8. To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Assigning the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Switch Function

Assigning the Mixing Activation Switch

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

CLR

Press the Clear key to

select the On option.

Mixing switch selected

Selected switch position

(On or Off)

Landing Mode

Elevator-to-Flap Mix

Press the Channel key

to access the switch

assignability option.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to select the

desired switch or

function to activate the

Aileron-to-Rudder Mix.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 43

44 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

The Landing Mode function automatically couples

the spoilers to the landing system. This inhibits the

use of the AUX 2 lever, preventing activation of the

spoilers at any other time than during use of the

landing system. Spoilers are connected to the AUX 2

channel on the receiver. The spoiler activation device

will then be linked to the landing position of the Flap

Mix switch.

LANDING MODE FUNCTION6.9

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Switch Position

Channel Mixing Value

Channel to be adjusted

Snap Roll Function

Aileron-to-Rudder Mix

Press Channel to select

the desired channel to be

adjusted.

Press Clear to reset to the

factory default position

1. Press the Channel key until "INH" is displayed in

the upper portion of the LCD.

2. Press the (+) or (-) keys to inhibit the Aux2 lever.

The display will change from "IHN" to "ACT,"

indicating that the Aux2 switch inhibit function has

been activated. To check to see that the Aux2 lever

has been de-activated, move the Aux2 lever while at

the Aux2 switch selection screen. If the lever is

deactivated, the display will not indicate changes

when the switch is pressed.

3. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down key.

4. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Up key.

5. To exit the Landing Mode function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

To Inhibit the Aux 2 Lever

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3 .Press either the Up or Down key until "LAND"

appears in the center of the LCD.

4 .Press the Channel key until "THRO" appears at the

upper right portion of the LCD.

5. Press the Channel key to select the desired

channels to be adjusted.

6. Use the (+) or (-) keys to set the desired landing

mode surface positions.

Note: The Flap position switch must be placed

in the LAND position for the values of the

Landing Mode function to be altered/adjusted.

If the display indicates "OFF," values cannot

be altered.

Accessing the Landing Mode Function

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 44

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

When the Automatic Landing Mode function is

active, the throttle stick will activate the landing

system setup on the preceding page. Any point of

throttle stick travel can be set as the auto landing

point. Once the throttle stick passes through this

point, and the Flap Mix switch is in the land

position, the landing system will be activated. Thus,

the elevator, flaps and spoilers would be activated if

all were selected. If the Flap Mix switch is not in the

Land function, the throttle operation will have no

effect on the landing system.

Note: When the Automatic Landing function is

active, the letter "A" will appear at the upper

right portion of the LCD.

1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function Mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "LAND THRO"

appears in the upper portion of the LCD, with (-) at

the bottom right corner.

3. Set the Flight mode switch in the LAND position

(Low).

4. Move the throttle stick to the desired position and

press the (+) or (-) key. The (-) on the display will

change to indicate the current throttle stick position

value, and an "A" will appear at the upper right

portion of the display. This is now the auto land

point. To change this value, move the stick to a new

position and press the (+) or (-) key. To clear the auto

land point, press the Clear key.

5. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down key.

6. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Up key.

7. To exit the Automatic Landing Mode function,

press the Up and Down keys simultaneously.

Note: When this function is active, the letter

"A" will appear at the upper right portion of

the LCD.

Automatic Landing System

Accessing the Automatic Landing Mode Function

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Snap Roll Function Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position.

Aileron-to-Rudder

Mixing

Press the (+) or (-) key to

set the Landing Mode

position for each channel.

Landing mode function is

activated

Current throttle stick

activation point

Press the Channel Key

to select the desired

channel to be adjusted.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 45

46 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

The Snap Roll function allows for easy and

consistent snap rolls at the touch of a switch. The

X-378 offers four separate directions of snap rolls

that you can select by using the keys located on the

front of the transmitter.

Selectable snap rolls are as follows:

R-DN Snap Roll Right and Down

R-UP Snap Roll Right and Up

L-DN Snap Roll Left and Down

L-UP Snap Roll Left and Up

The Snap Roll switch affects the aileron, elevator and

rudder only; all other functions work as normal.

While the snap roll switch is activated, the related

sticks will not operate until the switch is released.

When this function is inhibited, the display will show

"INH" and the snap roll system will not operate.

Individual adjustment is available for each control

surface in either direction. The adjustable range for

each function is 0-125%; the factory default is 100%.

When the Snap Roll function is active, the direction

will be indicated with the appropriate arrows in the

bottom left portion of the normal display screen.

SNAP ROLL FUNCTION

6.10

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

CLR

Snap Roll type selected

Press Channel key

Differential Aileron Function

Landing Mode Function

Press to select

desired channel

to be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to adjust the

value for each

channel.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (100%).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 46

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Once the snap rolls are established in the Function

mode, they can be selected using the keys located on

the front of the transmitter while in the normal

display. The keys shown below will explain how to

make these changes.

Note: When the Snap Roll function is active,

the snap roll switch will not activate the

stopwatch. It can be started and stopped

using the (+) or (-) keys.

Caution: When the transmitter is being used

as the master transmitter while training, the

Snap Roll Function is inhibited.

CLR

1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "S.ROLL"

appears in the center portion of the LCD.

4. Press the (+) or (-) key until the desired snap roll

direction is displayed in the upper portion of the

LCD directly above "S.ROLL."

5. Press the Channel key to display each of the three

channels with their respective control values. Press

the (+) or (-) key to increase or decrease the values

for each control. The adjustable value

is 0-125%. AILE - Aileron

ELEV - Elevator

RUDD - Rudder

6. Press the Channel key until the snap roll direction

is displayed again. Press the (+) or (-) key to change

the snap roll to the next direction. All four snap rolls,

with travel values, can be set Up for each airplane

and retained in memory.

7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 again as needed.

8. To access the Automatic Landing Mode function,

press the Down key.

9. To access the Aileron Differential function, press

the Up key.

10.To exit the Snap Roll function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Snap Roll Function

Press to select Right Snap Roll.

Snap Roll Direction Change

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Snap roll

direction—the

example shown

is Right-Down

(R-DN)

Press to select Up

Snap Roll. Press to select Down

Snap Roll.

Press to select

Left Snap Roll.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 47

48 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

The X-378 transmitter offers aileron differential for

the flapperon and delta-wing mixing selections.

Differential ailerons are used to tailor the flight

control system to a particular aircraft. Because the

downward travel of the aileron creates more drag

than does the upward travel, it is necessary to reduce

the amount of down travel for each aileron

electronically. This drag may very well produce a

yawing tendency in your aircraft. As yaw is

undesirable in most, if not all, R/C aircraft, it is best

to correct for this common flight tendency. Aileron

differential overcomes the yaw as it reduces the

downward travel of the ailerons.

Note: In order to use the Differential function,

flaperon or delta-wing mixing must be selected

in the System mode, and two servos must be

used to operate the ailerons, one each. Refer to

the Wing Mixing section for more information.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

DIFFERENTIAL AILERON MIXING

6.11

CLR

Press the Clear key to reset to the

factory default position (0%).

Differential Value

Flap Lever

Adjustment Snap Roll Function Press the (+) or (-) keys to increase

the value (range 0-100%).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 48

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

1.Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2.Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3.Press either the Up or Down key until "DIFF."

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD. Press the

(+) or (-) key until the desired amount of differential

is established. The operating range for differential is

0% (NORM) to 100% (SPLIT). The following diagrams

may ease the understanding of the differential

aileron.

If left at 0%, the ailerons maintain equal travel for

both sides. There will not be any differential

whatsoever. If set at 50%, the aileron that is lowered

travels 50%, or half, as far as the upward aileron. If

adjusted to 100%, you achieve what is commonly

referred to as a "split." This means that the only

aileron that moves is the aileron that travels upward.

The aileron that normally drops remains stationary.

4. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Down key.

5. To access the Flap Lever Adjustment, press the Up key.

6.To exit the Aileron Differential Mixing function,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Differential Aileron Mixing Function

MIXING FUNCTION

NORM: 0% Differential

DIFF: 50% Differential

SPLT: 100% Differential

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 49

50 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

FLAP LEVER ADJUSTMENT

6.12

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

The Flap Lever Adjustment function allows the

output value of the Flap Channel (Aux1) lever (Front

right of TX) to be adjusted to allow for fine or coarse

movement of the flaps relative to the Lever.

There are 3 different options for this function, they

are as follows:

TRIM

This function is used in conjunction with the

Landing Mode function. When selected, the flaps

position can be adjusted using the flap lever while in

Landing Mode. This is not a commonly used

function. The factory default position is 30%.

OFF

When this function is selected, the flap lever is

deactivated. The flaps will now only function through

the Flap Mix switch when the Landing Mode is selected,

and a value is given. This is the most commonly used

function of the Flap Lever Adjustment function. The

factory default position is 0%.

FULL

When this function is selected, the flaps will operate

through the flap lever. This function is used only

when the Landing Mode function is not selected. The

factory default position is 100%.

Please note that if both the Landing Mode and the

Full functions are selected, both functions will be

operational. This is not a desirable option.

The value of the flap lever can be altered to any

desired value using the (+) or (-) keys. This function

makes fine-tuning of the flaps very easy.

Press the Clear key to select

the desired function (TRIM,

OFF, or FULL).

Accessing the Flap Lever Adjustment Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "LEVER TRIM"

appears in the center of the LCD.

4. Press the Clear key to select the desired function to

be adjusted (TRIM, OFF, FULL).

5. Press the (+) or (-) key until the desired amount of

flap travel is established.

6. To access the Snap Roll function, press the Down key.

7. To access the Programmable Mix #1 function,

press the Up key.

8. To exit the Flap Lever Adjustment function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Current value

Programmable Mix #1

Snap Roll Function

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

increase or decrease the

values as needed.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 50

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CLR

PROGRAMMABLE MIXING 1-6

6.13

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

The X-378 offers six programmable mixes to be used

for any number of different purposes. This function

allows mixing any one channel to any other channel

to make the aircraft easier to fly. This mix can remain

on at all times or be switched on and off in flight

using a number of different switches.

Mix numbers 1-4 are of the standard variety, in that

the digital trim for the master channel only affect the

master channel, and not the slave channel.

Mix numbers 5 and 6 are of the "Trim Include"

variety. These mixes are used any time the mix you

are performing requires the slave channels trim

position to be varied when the master channels

digital trim position is varied. An example for this

type of mix would be when dual elevator or dual

aileron servos are used and connected to two

separate channels of the system, rather than using

a single channel with a Y-harness.

Each channel of this radio is identified by an

abbreviated name. The chart below indicates the

channel and its corresponding abbreviation. The

channel name appearing first is known as the

"master channel" or the channel to which you want

to mix. The second number is known as the "slave

channel" or the channel that is being mixed into the

master channel. For example, "AILE-RUDD" would

indicate aileron-to-rudder mixing. Each time the

aileron stick is moved, the aileron will deflect, and

the rudder will automatically move in the direction

and to the value input.

Mixing is proportional, so small inputs of the master

channel will produce small outputs of the slave

channel. Each programmable mix has a mixing

"offset." The purpose of the mixing offset is to re-

define the neutral position of the slave channel.

THRO: Throttle

AILE: Aileron

ELEV: Elevator

RUDD: Rudder

GEAR: Retract

Landing Gear

FLAP: Flap (AUX 1)

SPOI: Spoiler

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

select the Master channel.

Programmable Mix #2

Flap Lever Adjustment

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 51

52 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

to enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "MIX 1"

appears in the upper right portion of the LCD.

Selecting the Master and Slave Mixing Channels

4. Press the (+) key to activate the mix. Next, press

the (+) or (-) keys again to select the master channel.

5. Press the Channel key to move the cursor to the

slave channel position.

6. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the slave channel.

7. Press the Channel key once. The display will

continue to show the current mixing channels at the

top of the LCD, but will now have a flashing arrow at

the bottom left of the LCD to indicate the current

stick position (master) to be adjusted.

Setting the Mixing Values

8. While holding the master stick in the direction you

want to mix, press the (+) or (-) keys to increase or

decrease the mixing value for the slave channel. The

value at the lower right of the LCD will change to

display the current mix value selected. Next, hold the

master stick to the other side to adjust the mix for

the other direction.

Note: The current mixing switch must be in

the On position for the mixing values to be

adjusted.

Setting the Mixing Switch Activation

9. Press the Channel key once again. The display will

have "SW ON" indicated at the center portion of the

LCD with the word "ON" located in the upper right of

the LCD. This indicates the current switch

assignment to activate this mix. "ON" indicates that

this mix is currently selected to always be active (ON).

Mixing Operation and Switches

Each mixing program can be turned on and off by a

lever or switch. The levers and switches that can be

selected for program mixing are tabulated at the

right with their abbreviations appearing on the

display and their corresponding positions.

The mix switch options for Mix #1, 2, and 5-6 are:

ON: Always On

MIX: Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch

LAND: Activated in the LAND position of the Flap Mix

switch

ELE>F: Activated in the ELEV position of the Flap Mix

switch

The Mix switch options for Mix # 3 and 4 are:

ON: Always On

GEAR: Activated by the Gear Switch

LAND: Activated in the LAND position of the Flap Mix

switch

ELE>F: Activated in the ELEV position of the Flap Mix

switch

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function

CLR

Press the Clear key to store

the offset value or to reset

the mixing values to the

factory default positions.

Master Channel

Slave Channel

Stick position

to be adjusted Mixing Value

Mix currently on

Programmable Mix #2

Flap Lever Adjustment

Function

Press the Channel key to move

through the mixing functions

(Master/Slave Channel, Mix

Switch Activation, Offset Value)

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 52

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Setting the Mixing Channel Offset

1. Press the Channel key once again. The display will

show the current mixing channels at the top of the 4

LCD, with the word "OFFSET" at the center of the

LCD. The value to the lower right is the mixing Offset

neutral point, currently 0.

2. Hold the master stick in the position you want to

make the neutral point of the slave channel and push

the Clear key. A new value with a (+) or (-) sign will

appear. This is the new neutral point for the slave

channel (Point that the mix is activated). To reset the

value back to 0, move the master stick back to the

center position, and press the Clear key to reset.

Note: The master channel trim must be

centered for this to reset to 0 using the Clear key.

3. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

exit the Programmable Mix function.

Note: With a little practice, programmable

mixing will become easier compared with the

first time you try it. The best part of a

computer radio is that if you don't like

something, you can change it. Mixing is only

limited by your imagination.

Setting the Mixing Values

The X-378 transmitter has six multi-purpose

programmable mixes available. For these mixing

operations, first determine the mix type required

(standard 1-4, or trim include 5-6), master and slave

channels, offset and operating switch settings, if

necessary, and then adjust the mixing value.

For setting mixing value, move and hold the master

channel control (up, down, left or right) and set the

slave servo mix value by pressing either the (+) or

(-) keys. To reverse direction of the slave mix, press

the opposite of the (+) or (-) keys until the value of

mix is set in the reverse direction.

Please also note that if the reference of the offset

point is moved (see section below), the slave

channel's direction will change from that position.

Setting the Mix Offset Position

Any position of the master channel can be used as a

reference (starting) point for mixing. This is useful for

channels that have no neutral position. With this

function, you can use program mixing with respect to

an arbitrary position of the lever/switch. To set the

offset position, put the master channel at the desired

position and press the Clear key. The position is

stored in the memory and its offset value from the

neutral position is indicated numerically on the

display. Once this offset point has been set, the

mixing value at the offset position is now set to zero.

Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function continued

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 53

54 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

Selecting Flaps (Aux1) for the master channel:

When the slave channel is 2 (aileron), its mixing

operation is affected by aileron differential settings.

When the slave channel is 6 (flap), its mixing

operation is affected by flap-to-aileron mix settings.

When dual flaps are selected, and the slave channel

is 7 (AUX 2), its mixing operation is affected by the

aileron differential settings.

Trim Include Mixes 5 and 6

Programmable Mixes 5 and 6 offer mixing with the

Trim Include function. The Trim Include function is

automatically activated when mixes 5 and 6 are used.

Mixes 5 and 6 with Trim Include

Whenever the master channel is aileron, elevator,

rudder or throttle, you have the option of allowing

the master channel's trim lever to mix into the slave

channel. The Mixing with Trim function is always

activated in Mixes 5 and 6. You can observe the

operation by watching the slave channel while

moving the master channel's trim lever.

Note: If you have not yet entered values for the

mixing percentages, the slave channel will

remain stationary. Also, if the mixing

percentages are minute, the movement of the

slave channel from the trim lever is also minute.

Include Mixing

The Include Mixing function allows other

programmed mixing values for the master channel.

As stated previously, they Include Mixing function is

always activated in Mixes E and F.

For example, Mix 3: AILE - THRO

Mix 6: THRO - RUDD

Mix 6's operating value also now includes the

operating value from Mix 3's master channel

(Aileron). By moving the aileron control stick, Mix 3

has the ailerons mixing into the throttle, and now

also the rudder from Mix 6. At the same time, Mix 6

is mixing the throttle into the rudder only. Since the

Include Mixing is always active, you are also mixing

your ailerons into the rudder. This results in the

aileron stick moving not only the aileron servo but

also the throttle and rudder servos.

Include Mixing may sound complex, but it actually

eliminates the need for a third mixing program to

mix the aileron and rudder channels. Therefore,

Include Mixing reduces the number of mixing

programs needed when using multiple mixing

functions.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Functions Related to Program Mixing

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 54

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

The Fail-Safe/Hold function is available only when

you use the X-378 transmitter in either of the PCM

modulations-S-PCM or Z-PCM. This function is

designed to help minimize damage to your aircraft

during a loss of signal to the receiver. The servos

either assume the fail-safe presets or hold their last

good signal position.

Note: In the PCM modulations, the Fail-

Safe/Hold function cannot be totally

disabled so that the servos will react to

interference in the same way as they do in a

PPM (FM) system. This is only possible with

the use of a PPM receiver and the transmitter

in the PPM modulation. Since the actual

screen appearance varies depending on the

modulation of your radio, refer to the

appropriate modulation section that follows.

As noted earlier, if you are in the PPM modulation,

the Fail-Safe/Hold function is not applicable.

Therefore, the Fail-Safe/Hold function will not appear

on your LCD screen menu while in the PPM mode.

Refer to the Modulation Selection section for more

information pertaining to the broadcast signal of

your X-378 transmitter.

Hold (Z-PCM)

The Hold function is automatically activated when

the radio is turned on and is in the Z-PCM

modulation. This function stops (or holds) the servos

in the positions they were in just prior to the

interference. Therefore, your aircraft maintains the

position held immediately before the interference

was experienced. When a clear signal is restored, the

Hold function releases, and control of the airplane

returns to you.

FAIL SAFE/HOLD FUNCTION (PCM ONLY)

6.14

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

CLR

HO: HOLD

0.2: .25 SEC

0.5: .50 SEC

1.0: 1.0 SEC

Move the control sticks to the

desired HOLD position, then press

Clear to store these positions.

Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in Z-PCM Modulation

Trainer Function

Programmable Mix 6

Channel to be

programmed

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to select the desired hold

delay time.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 55

56 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On

position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

access the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the "FAIL S"

(Fail-Safe) appears in the upper left portion of the

LCD.

Note: If "Fail-Safe" does not appear on your

LCD, it is because you are transmitting in

PPM. Fail-safe is not applicable in the PPM

mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode

Selection section for more information.

You should never attempt to adjust the Fail-

Safe function when the aircraft is running.

When the Fail-Safe function is activated (i.e., when

the signal is interrupted), the transmitter

automatically moves each servo to a preset position.

The position that each servo assumes is determined

by you, as is the time length of interference that

must occur before servo movement.

After the interference has ceased, control of the

aircraft returns immediately to you. There are three

time delays to choose from: 0.25 second, 0.5 second

and 1.0 second. These time delays are the amount of

time it takes, starting the moment the interference

occurs, until the servos assume their preset

positions.

1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, adjust the

fail-safe presets.

2. Select among the three time delays (.25, .50 or 1.0

second) by pressing the (+) or (-) key until the

appropriate delay appears on the screen.

3. Next, hold the transmitter sticks in the positions

that you want the servos to assume during signal

loss conditions. You can determine fail-safe preset

positions for the other channels by placing the other

channel switches in the positions that you want

them to assume during interference.

4. With the sticks and switches in the desired fail-

safe positions, touch the Clear key. This will enter

these locations as the fail-safe memory settings.

A single high-pitched beep will be hear when the

Clear key is pressed indicating that the positions

have been memorized.

5. To confirm that the input of data was successful,

switch the transmitter off. The controls will move to

the input locations. If not, repeat Step 4 again.

Note: These preset positions remain stored

in the transmitter's memory until both the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium

back-up battery have been removed (or until

data reset has been performed). Therefore,

you do not have to reset the Fail-Safe each

time you fly. Should you want to re-adjust

the Fail-safe presets, access the Fail-Safe

function and adjust the presets as you have

just done. The transmitter automatically

recalls the settings for the last fail-safe

adjustment.

7. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Fail-Safe function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Accessing the PCM Hold Function (Z-PCM)

Setting the Fail Safe/Hold Memory in Z-PCM Modulation

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 56

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modualtion

Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold in S-PCM Modulation

The S-PCM Hold function is automatically activated

when the radio is turned on and is in the

S-PCM modulation. This function stops (or holds)

the servos in the positions they were in just prior to

the interference. Therefore, your aircraft maintains

the position held immediately before the interference

was experienced. When a clear signal is restored, the

Hold function releases, and control of the aircraft

returns to you.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. While the power switch is in the On position, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to access

the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the "FAIL-S"

(Fail-Safe) appears in the upper left portion of the

LCD.

Note: If "Fail-Safe" does not appear on your

LCD, it is because you are transmitting in

PPM. fail-safe is not applicable in the PPM

mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode

Selection section for more information.

The X-378 allows you to combine the Hold and Fail-

Safe presets for all seven channels on the receiver.

You can select Fail-Safe or Hold independently for

all channels on your aircraft. In other words, some

channels will hold their last clear signal position

(HOLD), while others assume the preset position

(Fail-Safe), Once the Fail-Safe has been activated by

signal interruption (interference), the transmitter

automatically moves the servos to a preset position.

The predetermined servo positions are set by you. In

the S-PCM Fail-Safe, the time delay (the amount of

time it takes, starting the moment the interference

occurs, until the servos assume the preset positions)

is fixed at .25 seconds. After the interference has

ceased, normal operation of the aircraft returns to

you immediately.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 57

58 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

1. Select all of the channels for which you want to

enter a Fail-Safe preset. To do so, use the Channel key

until the appropriate channel name appears in the

upper right portion of the LCD. We will use the

Aileron (AILE) for our example. The display will

appear as shown above.

2. Press either the (+) or (-) key. This will change the

display from Hold (HO) to the Fail-Safe (F.S.) preset

display.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for all channels desired to be

set to the Fail-Safe (F.S.) position.

4. Hold all of the appropriate transmitter control

sticks and switches in the desired positions and

press the Clear key. This will enter the location as the

fail-safe memory setting for all channels selected to

F.S. When the Clear key is pressed, a single high pitch

beep will be heard indicating that the Fail-Safe positions

have been stored. Continuing our example, hold the

aileron stick to the right and press the Clear key.

6. To confirm that the input of data was successful to

the applicable channels, switch the transmitter off.

All channels selected to Fail-Safe (F.S.) should to

their selected positions.

Note: These preset positions remain stored

in the transmitter's memory until both the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium

back-up battery have been removed (or until

the Data-Reset function has been utilized).

Therefore, you do not have to reset the Fail-

Safe each time you fly. Should you want to

re-adjust the Fail-Safe preset position,

access the Fail-Safe function once again and

adjust the presets as you have just done. The

transmitter automatically recalls the settings

for the latest fail-safe adjustment.

8. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press

the Down key.

9. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Fail-Safe/Hold function, press the Up

and Down keys simultaneously.

CLR

Setting the Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Moduation

Indicates Fail-Safe

channel to be

programmed

Trainer Function

Programmable

Mix 6

Press Channel to

select the desired

channel to be

programmed.

Press the (+) or (-)

Keys to select Hold

(HO) or Fail-Safe

(F.S.) modes for

each channel.

Press the Clear key to store

the fail-safe servo positions

for all channels set to F.S.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 58

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

The X-378 transmitter employs two separate types of

trainer systems:

1) Normal Trainer System

All functions are controlled by either the master

transmitter (MAST) or the slave transmitter (SLAVE).

2) Programmable Function Trainer

Individual Channel functions may be assigned to the

slave one at a time. Since the control functions can

be transferred one by one, students can concentrate

on only one function at a time until they are

competent to fly solo with all controls.

Trainer System

6.15

CLR

Press Clear to reset

to the factory

default settings

(Normal).

Trainer function

type selected (N for

Normal, P for

Programmable)

Trainer Mode

(Master or

Slave)

Timer Function

Fail-Safe Function (If PCM

Modulation is selected)

Press Channel to

select the desired

channel to be

programmed.

Press the (+) or

(-) keys to change

the settings of

each channel.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 59

60 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Accessing the Programmable Trainer Function

1.Move the transmitter switch to the On position.

2.Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press the Up or Down keys until "MAST" appears on

the center portion of the LCD.

4.Press the Channel key to select the channel to be

adjusted. The channel name will be displayed just to

the right of "MAST."

5.Once the channel appears that you want to make a

slave, press the (+) or (-) key. This will change the

display from "MAST" to "SLAVE." The "N" at the

upper right portion of the LCD will also change to

"P". If you want to make more slave channels, press

the Channel key until the next desired channel is

shown and press the (+) or (-) key to change the

settings.

6. To change the Programmable Trainer Function back

to the Normal Trainer System, press the Clear key.

7. To access the Fail-Safe function, press the Down key.

8. To access the Timer function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Trainer function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Channel to be adjusted

Channel has been set to

programmable Trainer mode

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 60

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

1.The slave transmitter must be PPM (Pulse Position

Modulation) and must be equipped with a DSC

(Direct Servo Control) or trainer jack. If the slave

transmitter is PPM/PCM selectable, select PPM. The

master transmitter can be PCM or PPM.

2.Plug the trainer cord (optional part #JRPA130) into

each transmitter's DSC/Trainer jack.

Note: Each transmitter will appear to be on,

but neither is actually transmitting at this time.

3. Switch the master transmitter on. Do not switch

on the slave transmitter; it is only necessary to have

the master transmitter on.

Note: If the master transmitter is the X-378,

the LCD will indicate "TRINR" (Trainer

Master) and will list the channels that have

been programmed when the power switch is on.

4.Pull the trainer switch toward you to transfer

control to the slave. Releasing the switch

automatically reverts to the master transmitter.

5.Be sure the slave transmitter's servo reversing, dual

rates, end-point adjustment and trims are identical

to the master transmitter. This can be checked by

pulling the trainer switch toward you. If the control

surfaces move, adjust the slave transmitter until the

trainer switch can be activated without a change of

the control surface position.

Use of the Normal Trainer System

In this mode, all functions are switched from the

master to the slave using the trainer switch. This is

the Normal mode–no function setup is necessary to

activate this system.

Use of the Programmable Trainer Function

In this mode, the master may assign functions to the

student one at a time to make learning to fly easier.

For example, the master may assign the slave aileron

and elevator. Then, when the trainer switch is

activated (pulled forward), the slave has control of

aileron and elevator only while the master retains

control of throttle and rudder.

Note: When all channels are set to master,

the Trainer System becomes Normal.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Basic Connections and Conditions for Training

Example of normal display screen indicating

trainer master with the normal (N) trainer

function selected

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 61

62 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

The X-378 offers two separate types of Timer

functions: Countdown and Stopwatch.

The Countdown Timer time is input in 10-second

intervals up to 35 minutes. The timer can be set for

each individual model and retained in the memory

for each model. Once the Timer function has been

activated, it can be started and stopped from the

Normal display screen using the Channel key. It can

also be started and stopped using the snap

roll/trainer button located at the front right portion

of the transmitter. When the X-378 is being used as

the master transmitter in the Training function the

trainer switch will not operate the timer start/stop

function, and the timer function cannot be used.

Note: In the Countdown mode, the transmitter

will beep three times at :30 seconds, two times

at :20 seconds, and beep one time every

second from :10 to 0. At zero there will be a

continuous tone for 1 second and then the

timer will begin counting up with a (+)

indication to the left of the time value.

When used as the Stopwatch, the timer will count up

to 44 minutes 59 seconds, at which time it will reset

to zero and continue to count.

TIMER FUNCTION

6.16

Timer option selected

Timer value set

Servo Reversing

Trainer Function

Press Channel to

select timer

options (off, down

timer, stop watch).

Press the (+) or (=)

keys to increase of

decrease the time

value.

Press Clear to reset the

Down timer value to the

factory default position

(10:00).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 62

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Airplane

Accessing the Timer Functions

1.Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2.Press the Down and Channel keys

simultaneously to enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until "TIMER" is

displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel Key to select the desired timer

option (Off, Down-Timer, Stopwatch)

Setting the Down-Timer value

Pressing the (+) key will change the display to

:10 each time the (+) is pressed, and the value will

increase in 10-second intervals up to 59:50

minutes. Pressing the Clear key will reset the

Countdown Timer to the factory default 10:00

minute value.

CLR

To exit the Timer function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Indicates current timer

value selected

Press the Channel key

to start/stop the timer.

Press the Clear key to reset to

the assigned timer value.

To access

the Trainer

function,

press the

Down key.

To access the Servo

Reversing function,

press the Up key.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 63

64 X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Airplane

PROGRAMMABLE MIXING OPTIONS

7.1

1. "Super" Mix

If 100% of mixing value is not enough, you can use a

second mix and mix more (or less, as the case may

be) into the original mix. For example: You may want

to mix the throttle channel to itself and remove the

throttle for certain aerobatic maneuvers. If -100% is

not enough, simply use an additional programmable

mix (same channels, Offset, mixing switch

assignment, etc.) and take the throttle out further.

2. Slow -Speed for Landing Approach

This mix slows down the engine to further ease the

landing. This mix can also be used for an engine that

idles too "hot" on the ground.

Connections and Mixing Operations

• Utilize one mix-to-mix throttle - throttle

(THRO-THRO)

• Slightly adjust the mixing value

percentage for the low throttle stick

position, -5% for example.

• For the mixing operator switch, it is

recommended that you use the land (LAND).

Selecting the LAND allows you to employ

landing operations simultaneously.

• To achieve the final mixing percentage, fly your

aircraft and make adjustments as necessary.

3. Dual-Elevator Servo Operations

This is most applicable in quarter scale aircraft

where one servo is not enough for the elevator

controls.

Note: By using the Programmable Mix 5 or 6

Functions, a Y-harness is not necessary. This

mix also corrects for the common problems

of asymmetrical elevator control.

Connections and Mixing Operations

• Connect the elevator servos to the elevator

(ELEV) and Auxiliary 2 (AUX 2) channels

respectively.

• Use one of your program mixes (5 or 6 only), and

mix elevator to AUX 2.

Note: Only mixes 5 and 6 offer the Trim Include

Mixing function and it is necessary that the

Digital trims also affect the slave channel (AUX

2) for this type of mixing.

With this special mix, your elevator servos function

exactly the same as if only one elevator servo were

used. Fine adjustments for servo direction and

neutral points should be made using Servo

Reversing and Sub-Trim functions.

Note: Each servo's adjustments are to be

made individually.

For Travel Adjustment values, use the Travel-Adjust

function.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 64

X-378 MANUAL Airplane

CHAPTER 8: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Airplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 65

66 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel (Pitch)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel (Gyro Sensitivity)

RECEIVER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT1.2

CONTROL IDENTIFICATION AND LOCATION

Helicopter Version Transmitter

1.1

SECTION III • CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter

Rudder/Throttle

Control/Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Trainer/Timer

Throttle Cut

Flight Mode

Switch Hover Throttle

Lever

Gear/Inverted

TX Antenna

AUX2/Hold

Rudder D/R

Switch

Aileron D/R

Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase

Decrease

Programming

Buttons

Clear Key

Neck Strap Eyelet

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Throttle

Trim Lever

Hover Pitch

Lever

Handle

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 66

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Rudder/Throttle

Control/Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

Neck Strap Eyelet

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel (Flap)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel (Spoiler)

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

(Left Aileron Channel–AIL 2)

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel

(Left Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel

(Right Flap Channel for Dual Flaps)

On/Off

Switch

Flap Mixing

Switch

Gear

Switch

Flap

Lever

Snap Roll/Timer/

Trainer Button

Rudder D/R Switch

Aileron D/R Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Throttle

Trim Lever

AUX 2

Lever

Spoiler/Rudder

Control/Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

Neck Strap Eyelet

On/Off

Switch

Flapperon

Crow

Switch

Flap Trim

Lever

Timer Trainer

Button

AUX2/Hold Rudder

D/R Switch

Aileron D/R Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Spoiler

Trim Lever

Flap

Lever

Helicopter Version Transmitter Airplane Mode

Helicopter Version Transmitter–Glider Mode

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:07 PM Page 67

68 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter

TRANSMITTER REAR1.3

TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL

CHARGING JACK FOR NI-CD

BATTERY ONLY (8N-550)

DSC/ TRAINER JACK

THROTTLE TENSION SCREW

ELEVATOR TENSION SCREW

AILERON TENSION SCREW

RUDDER TENSION SCREW

Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice

The Federal Communications Commission (FFC) requires that

changes in transmitter frequency must be performed only by an

authorized service technician (Horizon Service Center). Any

transmitter frequency change made by non-certified technician

may result in a violation of the FCC rules.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 68

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

DIRECT SERVO CONTROL (DSC)1.6

CONTROL STICK LENGTH ADJUSTMENT1.4

To adjust the stick length, use the 2mm Allen wrench

(supplied with your X-378 transmitter) to unlock the

set screw. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to

loosen the screw. Then, turn the stick clockwise to

shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen. After the

control stick length has been adjusted to suit your

flying style, tighten the 2mm set screw. If you desire

longer sticks, JR offers a thicker stick (JRPA047) that

is approximately one inch longer than the standard

stick. This stick, crafted from bar stock aluminum, is

available at your local JR dealer.

For proper DSC hook-up and operation:

1. Leave the transmitter power switch in the Off

position. The transmitter will not transmit any radio

frequency (RF) in this position.

2. Plug the (supplied) DSC cord into the DSC port in

the rear of the transmitter.

3. The encoder section of the transmitter will now be

operational and the LCD display will be lit.

4. Plug the other end of the DSC Cord into the receiver

charge receptacle. Turn the switch harness to the On

position.

Note: When you install the charging jack, be

sure to hook the charging jack receptacle

securely into the switch harness charge cord.

Why you should use the DSC function:

1. The DSC enables you to check the control surfaces

of your aircraft without drawing the fully operational

200mAh from your transmitter battery pack. Instead,

you will only draw 70mAh when using the DSC

function.

2. The DSC function allows you to make final

adjustments to your airplane without transmitting

any radio signals. Therefore, if another pilot is flying

on your frequency, you can still adjust your aircraft

and not interfere with the other pilot’s aircraft.

Note: Under no circumstances should you

attempt to fly your aircraft with the DSC cord

plugged in! This function is for bench-

checking your model only.

LOOSEN

TIGHTEN

SET SCREW

A—Charge Cord/DSC Receptacle

B—Switch Harness Lead

C—Charger/DCS Cord

CONTROL STICK TENSION ADJUSTMENT1.5

Remove the Ni-Cd battery and six transmitter back

screws as shown at previous page. Remove the

transmitter back, being careful not to cause damage

to any components.

Adjust each screw for desired tension (counter-

clockwise to loosen stick feel; clockwise to tighten

stick feel). When adjusting the throttle ratchet

tension, make sure that the adjusting screw does not

touch the PC board after adjustment is complete.

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Helicopter

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 69

70 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 1:CONNECTIONS • Helicopter

NECK STRAP ATTACHMENT1.7

An eyelet is provided on the face of the XP-378

transmitter that allows you to connect a Neck Strap

(JRPA023). This hook has been positioned so that

your transmitter has the best possible balance when

you use the neck strap.

Note: Double-check to ensure that the neck

strap is securely fastened to the transmitter.

BASE LOADED ADJUSTMENT

FREQUENCY NOTES/AIRCRAFT ONLY FREQUENCIES

1.8

An optional base-loaded antenna is available for use

with the X-378 transmitter. It is considerably shorter

than the standard antenna. However, the base

loaded antenna cannot be collapsed for storage in

the side of the transmitter. You must also use an

adaptor (JRPA156) to attach the antenna to your

X-378. The Base Loaded Antenna (JRPA155) is made

of a flexible coil and is covered with a soft plastic

material. Your range will not be affected when using

the base loaded antenna.

1.9

The X-378 transmitter employs a plug-in crystal for

transmitter that is glued in place at the time of

shipment. Per FCC regulation, the transmitter crystal

should only be changed by a certified technician.

Changing of the transmitter crystal by a non

authorized technician could result in a violation of

FCC rules.

The X-378 can transmit in either Pulse Code

Modulation (PCM) or Pulse Position Modulation

(PPM, commonly referred to as FM).

Be certain to observe the following guidelines:

1. Do not operate your transmitter when another

transmitter is using the same frequency, regardless

of whether the second transmitter is PCM, PPM (FM)

or AM. You can never operate two transmitters on

the same frequency simultaneously without causing

interference to both receivers and crashing both

aircraft.

2. For operation of your X-378 with additional

receivers, you should refer to the receiver

compatibility chart. The chart is located in the

Modulation Selection Section of this manual.

Aircraft-Only Frequencies

JR RF modules and receivers are available in 72MHz

frequencies in the United States for use with model

aircraft. Employing 72MHz frequencies does not

require a special operator’s license from the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC).

* A chart for all available frequencies is located

on page 185 of this manual.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 70

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 2:CONNECTIONS • Helicopter

It is extremely important that your radio system be

correctly installed in your model. Here are a few

suggestions on the installation of your JR equipment:

1. Wrap the receiver in protective foam rubber that is

no less than 3/8 inch thick. Secure the foam to the

receiver with #64 rubber bands. This protects the

receiver in the event of a crash or a very hard

landing.

2. The servos should be mounted using rubber

grommets and brass bushings to isolate them from

vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws;

this will negate the vibration absorption effect of the

rubber grommets. The diagram

to the right will assist you in

properly mounting

your servo.

The brass bushings are pushed from the bottom up

in the rubber grommets. When the servo screw is

tightened securely, it provides the proper security as

well as the proper vibration isolation for your servo.

3. The servos must be able to move freely over their

entire range of travel. Make sure that the control

linkages do not bind or impede the movement of any

of the servos.

4. Mount all switches away from the engine exhaust

and away from any high vibration areas. Make sure

the switch operates freely and is able to operate over

its full travel.

5. Mount the receiver antenna firmly to the airplane

to ensure that it will not become entangled in the

propeller or control surfaces.

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

CONNECTIONS2.2

2.1

4N600

4.8V 600mAh

JAPAN REMOTE CONTROL CO., LTD.

OFF

GEAR

7 CH 72MHz FM SLIMLINE

RECEIVER

ABC&W INTERFERENCE

PROTECTION SYSTEM

BATT

RUDD

ELEV

AILE

THRO

AUX1

RECEIVER BATTERY 4N-1000

DELUXE SWITCH HARNESS

(JRPA0001)

CHARGECORD OR

D.S.C. RECEPTACLE

(JRPS024)

CHARGECORD OR D.S.C.

D.S.C.-(JRPA132)

CHARGER-(JRPC221)

R700 RECEIVER

AUX 2

GEAR

RUDDER

ELEVATOR

AUXILIARY 1/PITCH

AILERON

THROTTLE

BATTERY

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 71

72 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 3:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Helicopter

BATTERY ALARM AND DISPLAY

CHAPTER 4:ALARM AND ERROR DISPLAY • Helicopter

4.1

When the transmitter voltage drops below 9.0-volts

DC, the display flashes “BATT” and an alarm sounds seven times. If you are flying when this occurs, land

immediately.

KEY INPUT AND DISPLAY3

The Function Selection keys are used to move up and

down through the functions.The Channel key is used

to advance the channel or function selected. The

Increase and Decrease keys are used to make changes in

the selected functions.

Press both keys at the

same time to enter or

exit the function mode.

DOWN

CHANNEL

INCREASE

DECREASE

CLEAR/STORE

Hereafter, explanation of all functions in this manual

will use the following designations to indicate

pressing individual keys:

UP DN

CLR

BACKUP ERROR DISPLAY4.2

All preprogrammed data is protected by a five-year

lithium battery that guards against main transmitter

battery failure. Should the lithium battery fail, the

display will indicate ERR1 regardless of the position

of the On/Off switch. If this occurs, it will be

necessary to replace the battery and reprogram all

data. All transmitter programs will return to the

factory default settings, and the data you have input

will be lost. When it becomes necessary to replace

the lithium back-up battery, contact JR Horizon

Service Center. Due to the possibility of extensive

damage caused by improper removal or replacement,

only JR Horizon Service Center is authorized to make

this change.

UP DOWN CHANNEL INCREASE DECREASE CLEAR

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 72

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

NORMAL DISPLAY5.1

When the power switch is in the On position, the

display will read as follows:

DIRECT ACCESS DIGITAL TRIMS5.2

The X-378 is equipped with a Direct Access Digital

Trim Value function. When at the normal display, if a

digital trim lever is moved, the screen will

automatically change to show the current trim value

for the channel being adjusted. When the trim is

returned to center, the screen will change back to the

normal display screen after a few seconds.

Displays the current trim value for the

channel being adjusted

Modulation Type Model Type

Model Number

Elevator Trim

Aileron TrimRudder Trim

Model Name

Throttle Trim

Flight Mode

To enter the System mode, press simultaneously then

turn on the power switch. To enter the Function model,

turn on the power switch, then press simultaneously.

In the Timer mode, press the Channel key to start/stop

the timer, and press the Clear key to reset the timer.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 73

74 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

1. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously.

2. Move the power switch to the On (upper) position.

3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the

menu and access the applicable function.

SYSTEM MODE5.3

To enter the System mode, press the Up and Down

keys simultaneously, then turn the power switch to

the on position. The display will show the last active

program. Pressing either the Up or Down key then

scrolls through the functions one by one, according

to the system mode flowchart shown below. Once

the appropriate function is displayed, changes can

be made by pressing the (+) or (-) keys.

System Mode Flowchart

Information pertaining to each function is explained

on the page listed next to the function name.

Functions will appear in the same order they are

shown on this chart.

Accessing the System Mode

Model Selection pg. 75

Model Name Entry pg. 77

Model Type pg. 78

Data Reset pg. 79

Modulation Selection pg. 80

Data Transfer pg. 81

Trim Step pg. 84

Throttle-Cut Switch

Activation pg. 85

Swashplate Type pg. 87

AUX 2 Channel

Input Selection pg. 86

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 74

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CLR

Accessing the Model Selection Function

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

The X-378 system offers memory for eight completely

separate models. Therefore, it is possible to have a

mixture of helicopter, airplane and glider setups

retained in memory. It is also recommended that the

Model Name Entry function be used in conjunction

with each model setup. Another very useful function

of the Model Selection function is the ability to set

one aircraft up several different ways. This is helpful

when multi-task performance is desired.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Model should be flashing on the right top portion

of the LCD. If not, press the Up or Down key until

“Model” is displayed and flashing.

3. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will select among each

of the eight models available. Notice that as each

model is selected, its name appears in the left

portion of the LCD.

4. To access the Copy Selection function, press the

Channel key.

5. To access the Model Name Entry function, press

the Up key.

6. Once the desired model is displayed on the left,

pressing the Up and Down keys simultaneously will exit

the Model Selection function and establish the model

displayed as the new current model.

Note: When changing from one model type to

another, it is not necessary to use the Type

Selection function. This is done automatically

by the computer.

MODEL SELECTION/MODEL COPY SELECT

5.4

Current Model Name “Model” flashing indicates

Model Select Function

Model Name Entry

Swashplate

Mixing

Copy

Selection Model Selection

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 75

76 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Accessing the Copy Selection Function

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

CLR

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move

the transmitter’s power switch to the On position.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “Model”

appears flashing on the top right side of the LCD.

3. The number that appears below the flashing

“Model” is the current model. This is important to

note, as only the current model will be the copied or

“from” model. Therefore, it is imperative to retrieve

the proper current model prior to initiating the copy

sequence. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select

the desired model to be copied.

4. Next, press the Channel key once. The word “Copy”

will appear at the top left of the screen indicating

that the Copy function has been selected.

5. The large number (1-8) at the bottom center of the

LCD indicate the accepting model.

6. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the

accepting model number.

Note: Always make sure that the accepting

model is either free of input or one which you

no longer want to retain in your transmitter’s

memory. Once the copying process has been

completed, the information of the accepting

model is lost and the current model is input as

the new data.

7. Once the desired accepting model is selected,

press the Clear key to complete the Copy Selection

function. The model number at the bottom of the

screen will flash several times indicating that the

model copy function was successful. The “from”

(template) model’s name and data will now replace

that of the accepting model.

8. To access the Spoiler Channel Input Select

function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Model Naming function, press the

Up key.

10. To exit the Copy Selection function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

The Copy Selection function enables you to copy all

of the settings of the current model to another

model within the same transmitter. This is very

useful when setting up one aircraft several different

ways or when trying an alternative setup of your

current model.

Model number

to be copied to

Press at Model

Select function

to access Copy

function.

Press Clear to copy current

model to model number

shown at the bottom of the

LCD screen.

Model Copy Select

Model number to

be copied

Model Naming

Spoiler Channel

Input Select

Press Increase or

Decrease to select

model number to

be copied to.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 76

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Accessing the Model Name Entry Function

CLR

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

The X-378 allows a 3-digit name to be input for each

of the eight models available. The current model will

be displayed in the Normal display when the timer is

not active. You may also find this useful to identify

different aircraft setups.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On (upper) position to enter

the Model Setup mode.

2. Use the Model Selection function to select the

model you want to name. (Please refer to the Model

Selection section at this time.)

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the first digit

of the model to be named is flashing on the left

portion of the LCD.

4. The current name will be displayed in the left

portion of the LCD. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will

select the first alphanumeric character.

Note: The character being selected will flash.

5. Press the Channel key to advance the character

selection to the next character.

6. Repeat this procedure until all three characters are

selected.

7. To access the Model Selection function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Type Selection function, press the Up

key.

9. To exit the Model Name Entry function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

MODEL NAME ENTRY

5.5

Model number

Clear Character

Flashing first digit

indicates Model

Naming function and

current character to

be changed

Model Type

Model

Select

Digit Select

Characters

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 77

78 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

Accessing the Type Selection Function

The X-378 is capable of performing as a helicopter,

airplane or glider radio with full functions for each.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down keys until “Acro,” “Heli,”

or “Glid” is displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

3. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the

type of model.

4. To access the Model Name Entry function, press

the Down key.

5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Up key.

6. To exit the Type Selection function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

MODEL TYPE SELECTION

5.6

CLR

Model Type

Change model

type

Data Reset

Model Naming

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 78

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE• Helicopter

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Press the Up or Down key until “RESET” appears in

the center of the LCD display. Check the number at

the right side of the display to be sure the model

selected is the model you want to reset.

3. To reset data, press the Clear key.

4. To access the Type Selection function, press the

Down key.

5. To access the Modulation Selection function, press

the Up key.

6. To exit the Data Reset function, press both the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Data Reset Function

The Data Reset function permits you to reset all the

functions and settings for the current model to

factory conditions. Resetting does not affect the data

already programmed for other models. Be sure to

confirm that you need to reset the data of the

currently indicated model in order to prevent

accidental loss of your valuable data.

DATA RESET

5.7

CLR

Model number to be reset

Press to data reset

current model.

Modulation Select

Model Type

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 79

80 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move

the power switch to the On position to access the

System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPCM,”

“ZPCM,” or “PPM” appears at the top of the LCD.

3. To change among the modulation types, press

either the (+) or (-) keys.

Note: When the Data Reset function is used,

the X-378 retains the current modulation

selected for each model. This means that the

modulation type does not change.

4. Pressing the Clear key will also reset the modulation

selection to the factory preset S-PCM.

5. To access the Data Reset function, press the

Down key.

6. To access the Data Transfer function, press the

Up key.

7. To exit the Modulation Selection function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Note: In the normal display, the selected

modulation type will appear in the middle of

the LCD.

Accessing the Modulation Select Function

The Modulation Selection function enables your

X-378 to transmit to a variety of JR receivers that are

already, or may soon be, in existence. You can select

from either of two types of PCM, Z-PCM or S-PCM,

depending on the Central Processing Unit (CPU)

within your receiver or from linear PPM (Pulse

Position Modulation [FM]).

Refer to the receiver compatibility chart below for

the correct modulation.

MODULATION SELECT

5.8

TX Modulation Compatible Receivers # of Channels &

Brief Description

PPM NER-226 6 (micro)

PPM NER-228 8

PPM (FM) NER-327x 7

PPM (FM) NER-527x 7 (micro)

PPM (FM) NER-529x 9 (micro)

PPM (FM) NER-549 9

PPM NER-600 6

PPM NER-610M 6

PPM NER-700M 7

TX Modulation Compatible Receivers # of Channels &

Brief Description

Z-PCM NER-236 6 (micro)

Z-PCM NER-627XZ or

627

“G” series

Z-PCM NER-J329P 9

Z-PCM NER-910XZ 10

S-PCM NER-955 10

S-PCM NER-D945 10

S-PCM NER-649S 9

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

Modulation

Reset to SPCM

modulation

Data Transfer

Data Reset Change

modulation

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 80

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

The X-378’s Data Transfer function allows for a model

from one X-378 transmitter to be sent to another

X-378 transmitter by using a JR Trainer Cord

(JRPA130 sold separately).

Transmitting Transmitter: It will first be necessary

to select the desired model (1-8) to b transferred to

the receiving transmitter. Access the Model Select

function and select the desired model number to be

transferred (See section 5.4 for information)

DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION

5.9

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

Indicates that the

DSC cord needs to

be inserted, and TX

power switch needs

to be turned off

Press to select Transmit (TX) or

Receive (RX ) modes.

Transmit Mode

Trim Step Modulation

Select

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 81

82 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

1. Both transmitters: With the main power switch off,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

while turning the power switch on to enter the

System mode. The word “TXDSC” will be displayed

and flashing.

2. Press the Channel key to select Transmit (TXDSC) or

Receive (RXDSC) modes.

3. Insert the trainer cord into each transmitter, the

letters DSC will be removed from the screen.

4. Turn off the power switch on each transmitter. The

screen will then change to read either “TXOUT” or

“RXSEL”, depending if transmit or receive modes

were selected.

Note: It is also possible to access the Data

Transfer function as follows:

Transfer Procedure

CLR

Transmitting condition

(0% not sent, 100%

transfer complete)

Press Clear to begin transmit

or receive procedure.

1. With the main TX power switch off, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously while inserting the

trainer cord into the DSC jack of both transmitters.

(The transmitters will now be in System mode

automatically)

2. Press the Channel key to select transmit (TX) or

receive (RX) modes.

3. Both transmitters: In the System mode, press the

Up or Down keys until the words “TXOUT” appears on

the screen. This is the Data Transfer program.

4. Receiving Mode Transmitter (TX to receive

programming): Press the Channel key until the screen

reads “RXSEL.” The word “MODEL” will begin

flashing at the top right portion of the LCD directly

over the current model number selected.

5. Select the receiving model number by pressing the

(+) and (-) keys.

Transmitting Data

6. Press the Clear key to activate the receiving stand-

by mode. The word “RX IN” will now be indicated on

the screen.

Model number and

program to be

transmitted (sent)

Trim Step

Modulation

Select Press Channel to

select Transmit

(TX) or Receive

(RX) modes.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 82

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

CLR

Indicates receiving condition (0%

not started, 100% completed)

Press the (+) or (-) keys to select

model number to receive program

(1-8) from sending transmitter.

The receiving transmitter must be in this Standby

mode before the sending transmitter’s Clear key is pressed, or the date will not be transferred

successfully.

Current receiving condition (0% not

started, 100% completed)

8. Transmitting mode transmitter (TX with program

to be sent): Press the Clear key to start transmitting

data. If the data transfer was successful, both

transmitters will indicate the value 100% on the

display when the transmitting is complete.

If there is a data receiving error during transmitting,

the counter will stop. At this time, press the Clear key

to stop the receiving function. If there is any failure

of transferring, the display will appear as follows:

When the receiving counter is stopped or you see

“ERROR” indicated, check the trainer cord

connection and condition and try again. Be sure that

the receiving Mode transmitter is in standby

condition first. Then on the transmitting transmitter

press the Clear key to start transmitting.

Note: The Data Transfer function will not

work when the battery alarm is flashing.

“MODEL” flashing indicates

current receiving model

number can be selected

using the (+) or (-) keys

Trim Step

Modulation Select Press Channel

to select

Transmit or

receive modes.

Press the Clear key to put the

receiving transmitter into Standby

mode. The screen will display “RX IN”.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 83

84 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

The Trim Step function allows the user to increase or

decrease the coarseness of the servo movement as

compared to the steps or beeps of the digital trim.

The total servo trim movement remains the same,

(approx. 30degree) regardless of the trim step rate

selected(1~10). The factory default setting for the

trim step function is 4, which means that for each

step (beep) of the digital trim, the servo will move in

digital increments of 4. In other words, if a finer trip

step value of 1 is selected, the servo will move in a

digital increment of 1 for each step (beep) of the

digital trim. If a more coarse trim value of 10 is

selected, the servo will more in a digital increment of

10 for each step (beep) of the digital trim lever.

TRIM STEP

5.10

CLR

Press Clear to reset to the

factory default 4 position.

Throttle Cut

Data Transfer

Press Channel to

select channel to

be adjusted

(Throttle, Aileron,

Elevator, Hover

Pitch Lever, Hover

Throttle Lever).

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase or decrease

the trim step rate.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 84

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

This is the function to assign Throttle Cut switch to

the push button located on upper front of the

transmitter. In the System mode, select the Throttle

Cut Switch function (CUT) by using Up or Down keys,

and press (+) or (-) keys to select the function on or

off. The Throttle Cut function is designed to return

the throttle trim to the lowest position instantly and

keep this position while the button is pressed. This

feature is used to “cut” or stop the engine without

changing the position of digital throttle trim.

THROTTLE CUT SWITCH ACTIVATION

5.11

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

CLR

Press Clear to reset to the

factory off position.

AUX 2 Switch Selection

Trim Step Press the (+) or (-)

keys to turn the

Throttle Cut function

on and off.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 85

86 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

Accessing the AUX 2 Channel Input Selection Function

The AUX 2/Gear channel input selection function

allows you to select which switch, AUX 2 or Flight

mode, will activate the AUX 2 function, as well as

activating or inhibiting the Gear switch.If you use the

AUX 2 function for the gyro sensitivity adjustment,

you can change the rudder dual rate and the gyro

sensitivity at the same time via the Flight mode

switch. Conversely, if the AUX 2 switch is used, the

gyro sensitivity is changed when the AUX 2 switch is

activated.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the on position to enter the

System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “AUX2” is

displayed in the center portion of the LCD.

3. Pressing either the Increase or Decrease keys will

change the activation switch from the AUX 2 switch

to the Flight mode.

4. Pressing the Clear key will reset the AUX 2

activation switch to the AUX 2 switch.

5. Pressing the Channel key will select the Gear

channel switch activation.

6. Pressing either the increase or decrease keys will

change the switch assignment from INH to Act.

7. Pressing the Clear key will rest the Gear switch to

the ACT (Active) position.

5. To access the Throttle Cut switch function, press

the Down key.

6. To access the Swashplate Type function, press the

Up key.

7. To exit the AUX 2/Gear channel input selection

function, press the Down and Channel keys

simultaneously.

AUX2/GEAR FUNCTION SELECT

5.12

Gear switch activation

Press Clear to reset

to factory settings.

AUX 2 function selection

Swashplate Type

Throttle Cut Select

Gear switch

activation

Press Increase

or Decrease to

change switch

options.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 86

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 5:SYSTEM MODE • Helicopter

The Swashplate Mixing function enables the X-378

system to operate many different types of swashplate

control systems, including 3 versions of CCPM.

The Swashplate options are:

1 Servo: Non-CCPM, standard mixing type helicopter.

2 Servo/180° CCPM

3 Servo/120° CCPM (JR style, most popular)

3 Servo/90° CCPM

Note: Although the X-378 Swashplate Mixing

Type screen displays 4SERV 90 CCPM mixing,

this function is actually 3 Servo/90° CCPM

mixing, and cannot be used with current 4

Servo/90° CCPM models.

SWASHPLATE TYPE

5.13

Accessing the Swashplate Type Function

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the ON position to enter the

system mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until SWASH is

displayed in the left center portion of the LCD.

3. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to change the

Swashplate type.

4. Pressing the Clear key will reset the Swashplate

Type to the Normal position.

5. Pressing the Channel key will select the Gear

Channel switch activation.

6. Pressing the Clear key will rest the Swashplate Type

to the factory default (Normal) position.

7. To access the AUX2 Switch function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Model Select function, press the

Up key.

8. To exit the Swashplate Type function , press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Model Select

AUX2 Function

Press the + or - keys to select the

desired Swashplate Mixing type. Press Clear to reset to the

factory default setting.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 87

88 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Accessing the Function Mode

To enter the Function mode, switch the transmitter

power switch to the On position. Press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously, and the display will

show the last active program. Pressing either the Up

or Down key then scrolls through the functions one by

one, according to the Function Mode Flowchart

shown on the right. Once the appropriate function is

displayed, changes can be made by pressing the (+)

or (-) keys. To select another channel of a particular

function, press the Channel key. If you transfer to a

different function that is channel selectable, the

display will show the same channel. For example, if

you are adjusting the dual rate of the elevator and

you change to the Exponential function, the channel

remains elevator. The Function mode is the most

often used system to input data.

Function Mode Flowchart

Information pertaining to each function is explained

on the page listed next to the function name.

Functions will appear in the same order they are

shown on this chart.

1. Move the power switch to the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the

menu and access the applicable function.

FUNCTION MODE

6.1

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Servo

Reversing pg.87

Dual-Rate pg.90

Exponential pg.92

Sub-Trim pg.93

Travel Adjust pg.94

CCPM Mixing (only

when CCPM is

selected in System

Mode) pg.94

Throttle Hold pg.95

Throttle Curves

(3) pg.98

Pitch Curves

(4) pg.101

Inverted Switch

pg.103

Revolution

Mixing pg.104

Gyro Gain

Function pg.106

Programmable

Mixing 1-3 pg.110

Fail-Safe (only visible

when PCM Modulation

is selected) pg.114

Trainer Function

pg.117

Timer Function

pg.119

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 88

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Accessing the Reverse Switch Function

The Reverse Switch function is an electronic means

of reversing the throw of a given channel (servo). All

seven channels of the X-378 offer reversible servo

direction. This will ease setup during the servo

installation into your aircraft.

1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “REV.”

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Using your transmitter’s control sticks, switches

and potentiometers, move the control surfaces of

your aircraft. Note the travel direction of each of the

corresponding control surfaces.

5. After you have determined which channel(s) need

to have the throw directions reversed, use the

Channel key to call up the appropriate channel.

6. Press either the (+) or (-) keys to change the travel

direction of the servo. Pressing the Clear key returns

the travel direction to normal.

7. You can observe the change in the travel direction

by moving the appropriate control at this time.

8. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Reverse Switch function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

SERVO REVERSING

6.2

CLR

Channel to be adjusted

Press Clear to reset to the

factory normal direction.

Dual-Rate

Function Timer

Function

Press Channel to

change to the

desired channel to

be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to change the

servo direction.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 89

90 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Accessing the Dual Rate Function

CLR

Dual rates are available for the aileron, elevator and

rudder channels of your R/C aircraft. There is also an

automatic dual rate setting to link your aileron,

elevator, and rudder dual rates to the flight model

switch. This Automatic Dual-Rate function is

discussed in a separate section that follows. Dual

rates may be defined as the ability to vary the travel

or throw rate of a servo from a switch. Due to the

differing travel rates, you will find that the sensitivity

of the control either increases or decreases

accordingly. A higher rate or travel yields a higher

overall sensitivity. You may find it easier to think of

the Dual-Rate function as double-rates or half-

rates.The Dual-Rate function works in conjunction

with the Exponential function to allow you to

precisely tailor your control throws. You may want to

consult the section defining exponential for further

information.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the on

position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “D/R”

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

(aileron, elevator, rudder or automatic dual rates)

appears.

5. Select the switch position for which you want to

adjust the rate. The number to the upper right of the

current rate value on the display indicates the

current position of the dual rate switch for the

channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or a 1 will

be shown, corresponding to the position of the

switch. To select the opposite switch position, move

the appropriate dual rate switch to the opposite

position. The number that appears above the current

rate value reflects the change.

6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch

position that you have just selected. To decrease the

throw rate, press the (-) key. To increase the throw

rate, press the (+) key. As stated previously, the

adjustable rate is from 0-125% for each switch

position and channel.

DUAL RATES

6.3

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Channel to be

adjusted

D/R switch

position (0 or 1)

Press Clear to

reset to factory

default settings

(100%).

The amount of travel is adjustable from 0-125% in 1%

increments. The factory setting, or default value, for

both the 0 and 1 switch positions is 100%. Either

switch position may be selected as the low or high

rate by placing the switch in the desired position and

adjusting the value accordingly.

Exponential Servo

Reversing

Press Channel to

select Aileron,

Elevator, Rudder,

or Auto D/R to be

adjusted.

Press (+) or (-) to

increase or decrease

D/R values.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 90

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Accessing the Dual Rate Function (continued)

Note: You can observe the servo changes

by moving the respective stick while increasing

or decreasing the values. The control changes

accordingly. To clear the dual rate for the

respective channel and switch position,

press the Clear key. After the dual rates have

been dialed in to your satisfaction, we

suggest that you begin to adjust the

exponential values. Refer to the Exponential

section for more information.

7. To access the Servo Reversing function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Exponential function, press the

Up key.

9. To exit the Dual-Rate function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Automatic Dual Rate

If the Automatic Dual-Rate function AUTO is active

(on) when switching the flight mode switch, aileron, elevator and rudder channel Dual-Rate values are

switched to preset values settled by position 1.

Press Clear to return to the

factory default setting (off).

To access this function, move to the D/R (Dual-Rate)

screen, and press the Channel button until the word

“AUTO” appears at the top center of the screen, with a

small box with the number 1 to the far left. This would

indicate the Auto D/R function for Flight mode 1.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the function on or off.

Repeat this procedure for flight modes 2 and

Hold (HO).To confirm that the Auto D/R is

functioning, simply move the flight mode switch

while at any of the normal D/R channel screens. If

the Auto D/R is functioning, the screen will indicate

“D/RAT“, and the D/R switch position at the far right

of the screen will change from 0 to 1 as the switch

is moved.

Off or On

Flight mode position

to be adjusted

Exponential Servo

Reversing

Press Channel to

select the desired

flight mode to

adjust (1,2 or HO).

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to turn the Auto

D/R function on or off.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 91

92 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Accessing the Exponential Function

Programmable exponential adjustments are offered

on the aileron, elevator, and rudder channels of your

R/C aircraft. Exponential is a function that allows you

to tailor the response rate of the stick controls. The

purpose of exponential is to reduce the sensitivity in

the middle portion of stick movement, while still

allowing full travel at the end of the stick movement.

In other words, the end result (travel) remains the

same, although exponential changes the rate at

which it achieves this travel.

The adjustable range of the Exponential Function is

from 0-100%. Zero percent (0%) is linear stick control

which means that the response rate is equal

throughout the stick control. 100% is full

exponential. The larger the exponential value, the

less servo action or sensitivity you will notice around

the neutral setting.

Note: The Exponential function operates in

conjunction with the Dual-Rate function. It is

imperative to understand the Dual-Rate

function prior to adjusting the exponential

values. Exponential may be selected for either

the high or low rate or both.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

access the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “EXP” (Expo-

nential) appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

(aileron, elevator, rudder or AUTO) appears.

5. Select the switch position for which you want to

adjust the exponential rate. The number directly

above the exponential value on the display indicates

the current position of the dual rate switch for the

channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or 1 will be

shown, corresponding to the position of the switch.

To select the opposite switch position, move the

appropriate Dual-Rate or Flight mode switch to the

opposite position. The number that appears directly

above the Exponential value will reflect the change.

6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch

position that you have just selected. To increase the

exponential rate, press the (+) key. As stated

previously, the adjustable rate is from linear (0%)

to100% for each switch position and channel.

Note: Exponential is an acquired feel. As such, it

may take several test flights to achieve the proper

amount of exponential that fits your flying style.

8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Exponential Function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

EXPONENTIAL6.4

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

CLR

Press Clear to reset

values to the factory

default position.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

Increase or decrease the

Exponential values, or to

activate or inhibit the

Exponential function in the

Auto Dual-Rate modes.

Dual-Rate switch

position to be

adjusted

Channel

to be adjusted

Sub-Trim Function Dual-Rate

Function

Press to select Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,

or AUTO position to be adjusted.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 92

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

The Sub-Trim Adjustment function allows you to

electronically fine-tune the centering of your servos.

Individually adjustable for all seven channels with a

range of ±125% (+/-30 degrees servo travel), the sub-

trims can be set for the same neutral settings for

each model stored in the transmitter’s memory. The

sub trim functions provides precise servo arm

neutral positioning if rotating the servo arm will not

allow the desired servo arm position.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. To access the Function mode, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SUBTRIM”

appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired

channel appears.

5. Press the (+) or (-) key to establish the desired

amount and direction of Sub-Trim.

Note: A (+) or (-) symbol appears to the left of

the sub trim value to indicate the direction of

Sub-Trim input.

Caution: Do not use excessive sub-trim

adjustments since it is possible to overrun

your servo’s maximum travel if it is off-center.

Remember that it is a trim convenience

function. It is not intended to take the place

of the proper mechanical trim adjustments

that are necessary on any R/C model. An offset

servo will also produce a differential effect.

6. To access the Exponential function, press the

Down key.

7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the Up key.

8. To exit the Sub-Trim function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing Sub-Trim Adjustment Function

CLR

SUB-TRIM6.5

Press Clear to reset to the

factory default settings (0%).

Sub-Trim Value

Channel to be

adjusted

Travel Adjust Exponential

Press to select

desired channel to

be adjusted (1-7).

Press the (+) or

(-) keys to

increase or

decrease the

Sub-Trim value.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 93

94 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

The purpose of travel adjust, also known as endpoint

adjustment or adjustable travel volume, is to offer

you precise servo control deflection in either

direction of servo operation. The X-378 offers travel

adjust for all seven channels. The travel adjust range

is from 0-150% (0 degrees to 60 degrees) from

neutral, or center, and it can be adjusted for each

direction individually. The factory default (data reset)

value is 100% for each direction of servo travel.

TRAVEL ADJUST

6.6

Accessing the Travel Adjust Function

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On

position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRAVL”

appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

appears.

5. Move the appropriate control stick (lever, switch, etc)

to the right or left of center to the direction of travel

you want to adjust. An arrow to the right of the travel

adjust value will reflect the current position to be

adjusted. Using our example above, if the aileron stick

is moved to the left, a left-facing arrow will appear to

the left of the travel adjust value on the LCD screen.

6. After the control stick or switch is placed in the

direction of travel to be adjusted, press the (+) or (-)

key until the proper amount of servo travel is shown

on the lower right side of the LCD. Press the (+) key

to increase the amount of servo travel. Press the (-)

key to decrease the amount of servo travel.

7. Follow the same procedure for the remaining

channels.

8. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Throttle Hold (or CCPM Mix if

activated) function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Travel Adjust function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

CLR

Press Clear to reset

to factory default

settings (100 %).

Travel direction to be

adjusted (left/Right,

Up/Down, etc)

Channel to be adjusted

Throttle Hold

(or CCPM Mix

if activated) Sub-Trim

Press Channel to

select the desired

channel to be

adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to increase or

decrease the Sub-

Trim values.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 94

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

Note: The CCPM Swashplate Mixing screen is

only displayed when Swashplate types 2Serv,

3Serv or 4Serv CCPM are selected in the

Swashplate type Selection in System Mode.

If The Swashplate Type option has not been

selected, proceed to section 6.7 Throttle Hold.

The CCPM Swashplate Mixing Function(Cyclic

Collective Pitch Mixing) of the X-378 is designed to

allow the X-378 to be used in model helicopters that

utilize 2-servo(180°), 3-servo(120°) and 3-servo(90°)

type swashplate control system.

The desired swashplate mixing type must first be

selected at the Swash Type Selection in System Mode.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

ON position.

2. Access the Function Mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the UP or DN key until SWASH

appears in the middle left portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

appears.

5. Press the + or - Keys to Increase or Decrease the

CCPM Values, or to access the EXPO function

6. Follow the same procedure for the remaining

channels.

8. To access the Travel Adjust Function, press the

Down key.

9. To access the Throttle Hold Function, press the

Up key.

10. To exit the Swashplate Type Function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

CCPM SWASHPLATE MIXING

6.7

Accessing the Swashplate Type

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Channel to be adjusted

CCPM Swashplate Mixing Type

Mix Value

Throttle Hold Travel Adjust

Press Channel to select desired

channel and Expo settings.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

adjust the CCPM value for each

channel, and also to activate or

inhibit the EXPO function.

Press the Clear key to reset

the CCPM values back to the

factory default positions.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 95

96 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CCPM is a type of pitch mixing where the two or

three servos are connected directly to the swashplate

of the helicopter and physically move both together

and independently for all changes in pitch/cyclic.

Please refer to the diagram below.

CCPM Swashplate Mixing (continued)

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

1). 1 servo (Standard Mechanical Mixing)

The most common form of Swashplate Mixing. This

type uses each of the three servo to move the

swashplate individually for pitch, Aileron, and

Elevator changes. If one servo(NORM) is selected in

the System Mode (Factory Default), the Swashplate

Type Function will not appear on the LCD screen in

this section.

2). 2 servo(180degrees)

2 servos are used to move the swashplate, and are

spaced at 180degrees apart. This is not a very

common control system configuration.

3). 3 servo(120degrees)

3 servos are used to move the swashplate, and are

spaced at 120degrees apart. This is the most

common form of CCPM, and is found in JR and other

brands of Helicopters.

4). 3 servo(90degrees)

3 servos are used to move the swashplate, and are

spaced at 90degrees apart. This is also not a very

common control system configuration.

Note: Although the display of the X-378

indicates 4 Servo 90° CCPM, this is actually 3

Servo 90° CCPM as mentioned above. 3 Servo

90° CCPM can not be used with a 4 Servo 90°

CCPM control system.

CCPM Servo Connection/ Channel Numbers

2 servo(180°) 3 servo(120°) 3 servo(90°)

Ch 2 Aileron Ch 2 Aileron Ch 2 Aileron

Ch 2 Elevator Ch 3 Elevator

Ch 6 Pitch Ch 6 Pitch Ch 6 Pitch

Exponential (EXP)

The purpose of this exponential is to remove the

non- linear, or rough movement of the swashplate

due to the mechanical differential of the servo horn.

This will be a help to change circular movement of

servo horn to linear movement. The Exponential

function can be turned on and off by selecting the

EXP function with the Channel key, and then pressing

the (+) or (-) keys .

3 Servo/90° CCPM

2 Servo/180° CCPM

Ch2

Ch6

Ch3

3 Servo/120° CCPM

(JR style, most popular)

CCPM Servo Variations

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 96

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “HOLD”

appears at the top center of the LCD.

4. The factory setting for the throttle hold is off.

Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will activate Throttle

Hold and display the current throttle hold value.

5. Using the (+) or (-) key, adjust the throttle hold value

to deliver the proper engine idle rpm for your

helicopter. The adjustable range is (-20%-+50%). Once

you establish the proper idle value for your engine, you

can use this value for throttle hold as well. To shut the

engine off for autorotation, a negative or zero value

should be input.

Note: When the throttle hold is activated,

and the switch is on, the ‘’ON“ indication on

the LCD flashes.

6. To access the Travel Adjust (or CCPM Mix if

activated) function, press the Down key.

7. To access the Throttle Curve function, press the

Up key.

8. To exit the Throttle Hold function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Throttle Hold Function

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

The Throttle Hold function is designed to hold the

throttle servo in a specific position during an

autorotation. This is very useful for practicing

autorotation landings. The throttle hold switch is

located on the top right-rear corner of the

transmitter. The throttle hold is on in the forward

switch position; in the rear position, the Throttle

Hold is off.

THROTTLE HOLD

6.8

Press Clear to reset

to the factory default

setting (off).

Throttle Hold Value (+ or -)

“ON” will flash when the

Throttle Hold function is

activated, and the switch

is in the On position.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to activate the

Throttle Hold

function and set the

desired value.

Throttle Curve Function

Travel Adjust (or CCPM

Mix if activated)

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to activate and

adjust the Throttle

Hold value.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 97

98 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

The transmitter is factory preset to the throttle

curve as indicated by the solid line in the figure at

right. Individual middle points can be increased or

decreased to suit your specific needs.

The throttle trim lever position will affect

the low-point position as shown when in

the Normal mode Throttle Curve.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

The X-378 offers three (3) separate throttle curves with

five adjustable points per curve. This function allows

you to customize the throttle curve and pitch curve

together to maximize engine performance at a

particular pitch setting. Once the throttle curves are

established, each can be activated in flight using the

three (3) position flight mode switch.

The flight mode switch offers three selectable ranges:

N=Normal, 1=Stunt-1, and 2=Stunt-2. The N (Normal)

position should be used as the hover throttle curve.

Positions 1 and 2 (Stunt-1 and Stunt-2) should be

used for aerobatic maneuvers and forward flight.

Note: The throttle trim and hovering throttle

levers are only operable when the flight

mode switch is in the normal position. Thus,

in the 1 or 2 positions, these two functions

have no effect. Also, adjusting the hovering

throttle lever and throttle trim has no effect

on the input values of the throttle curve.

Each of the five points of the throttle curve are

independently adjustable from 0-100%. These five

points correspond to the position of the throttle stick.

The illustration below shows the normal throttle

curve setting for the dead slow position with throttle

trim at default.

THROTTLE CURVES

6.9

CLR

Press Clear to

reset to the

factory default

settings.

Output Value

100%

50%

H321

(INH) (INH)

Hovering Throttle Knob

Operating Range

Throttle Trim

Operating Range

Point L

Throttle Stick

Flight Mode

(normal)

Throttle stick input position Point to be

adjusted

(L,1,2,3,H)

Point Value

Press Up to access

Throttle Curve modes

for Stunt 1 and 2. Throttle Hold

Press to select point position

to be adjusted (L,1,2,3,or H).

Press (+) or (-) to

activate points 1 and

3, and also to

increase or decrease

the point values.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 98

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Accessing the Throttle Curve Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function Mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “THRO”

appears in the upper right portion of the LCD.

Note: The characters directly under the battery

graph at the top left of the LCD is the Flight

mode switch position curve currently being

adjusted. Use NORM for hover curves and 1

and 2 for stunt curves. We will concentrate on

the hovering curve during this example.

4. Press the Channel key to select the point of the

curve you want to change.

5. Press either the (+) or (-) key to change the value

of the current curve point. The range of each point is

0-100% in .5% intervals.

Note: In each curve, the factory setting

indicates INH for points 1 and 3. These values

are 25% and 75% respectively if no value

changes are made to any other points. If any

of the other points have been changed while

these points were inhibited, the inhibited

points will also change to plot a smooth curve.

If you want to keep this from happening, press

the Channel key until the display indicates P-1

or P-3 at the upper right portion of the LCD.

Press either the (+) or (-) key to activate the

points 1 (25%) or 3 (75%). The values for each

of these curves can then be fully adjusted by

pressing either the (+) or (-) key.

6. To set curves for flight mode switch position 1,

press the Up key once and repeat steps 4 and 5.

7. To set curves for flight mode switch position 2,

press the Up key once and repeat steps 4 and 5.

8. To access the Throttle Hold function, press the

Down key until “HOLD” is displayed.

9. To exit the Throttle Curve function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

CLR

25% value indicates that point #1

is now activated

The throttle trim lever is only active when the flight

mode switch is in the normal position. The throttle

trim is used to increase or decrease the engine

power when the flight mode switch is in the Normal

mode. The throttle trim lever has no effect on

positions 1, 2, or in throttle hold.

Note: Making changes to the throttle trim lever

does not change the input values for any of the

points on the throttle curve; it merely makes

adjustments to the engine idle speed position.

Throttle Trim Settings

-- Lines on screen indicate

that point #1 is Inhibited

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 99

100 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

The Hovering Throttle lever increases or decreases

the engine output power for the middle three points

set for the throttle curve. As shown in the figure

below, use of the hovering throttle lever shifts the

curve upward or downward parallel with the original

curve. Therefore, operation of the hovering throttle

knob does not cause any change to the original

settings of the throttle curve.

Hovering Throttle Lever Setting

100%

50%

H32

Hovering Throttle Knob

Operating Range (Parallel)

Throttle Trim

Operating Range

Point L

Throttle Stick

The throttle trim range will affect the throttle

curve as shown.

The adjustable range of output using the

hovering throttle lever is

approximately +/-9%.

Note: The Hovering Throttle has no effect

on flight mode switch positions 1 and 2.

With the X-378 system, individual throttle curves are

selectable to be either straight (linear) or curved

(exponential) setting.With the exponential function

on, you will notice that any sharp angles of the

throttle curve will become more “rounded” or

“smooth”, creating more equal throttle servo

movement during the entire curve range.

Throttle Curve Exponential

1. From the Throttle Curve function, press the Channel

key until “EXP” appears at the center of the LCD

screen.

2. Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the Exponential

function on or off.

3. To exit the Throttle Curve function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneuosly.

Accessing the Throttle Curve Exponential Function

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 100

101

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

PITCH CURVES

6.10

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Adjustment of the pitch curve is very similar to the

throttle curve adjustment described in the preceding

section. A thorough understanding of the Throttle

Curve Section will make pitch curve adjustment easier

to understand. There are four independent types of

pitch curves available: Normal, Stunt-1, Stunt-2 and

Hold. Each pitch curve contains five adjustable

points: L, 1, 2, 3 and H.

Note: The pitch curve for the Throttle Hold

function can only be set if this system is

activated.

Point value

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “PIT” appears

in the top right portion of the LCD.

Note: The characters directly under the

battery graph at the top right portion of the

LCD is the flight mode switch position curve

currently being adjusted (Normal, 1,2 or H).

Use NORMAL for hover curves and 1 and 2

for stunt curves. We will concentrate on the

hovering curve during this example.

4. Press the Channel key to select the point of the

curve you want to change.

5. Press either the (+) or (-) key to change the value

of the current curve point. The range of each point is

0-100% in .5% intervals.

Note: In each curve, the factory setting - -

indicates Inhibited for points 1 and 3. These

values are 25% and 75% respectively, if no

value changes are made to any other points.

If any of the other points have been changed

while these points were inhibited, the

inhibited points will change to plot a smooth

curve. If you want to keep this from

happening, press the Channel key to display

the positions 1 and 3, then press the (+) or

(-) key to activate each point.

6. To set curves for Flight mode switch position 1,

press the Up key and repeat steps 4 and 5.

7. To set curves for flight mode switch position 2,

press the Up key again and repeat steps 4 and 5.

8. To set the curves for the Throttle Hold mode ‘’H’’,

press the Up key once again until ‘’H’’ is displayed,

and repeat steps 4 and 5.

9. To access throttle curve switch position 2, press

the Down key four times.

10. To exit the Pitch Curve function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Pitch Curve Function

Flight mode will flash when flight

mode switch is in the current

flight mode to be adjusted

Throttle stick position Point to be adjusted

(L,1,2,3,H)

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 101

102 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

The Hovering Pitch lever operates in the same

manner as the Hovering Throttle knob. It is only

operable while the flight mode switch is in the ‘’N’’

(normal) position, and its function is to shift the

middle portion of the curve upward or downward.

Example of Throttle Curve and Pitch Curve Settings

An example of throttle curve and pitch curve settings

for aerobatic specifications is shown below in the

form of graphs. Details of the curves will differ

depending on the helicopter specifications. In these

examples, the throttle open-close stroke and

autorotation pitch stroke are set 0 to 100 to ease

your understanding of other curves.

Hovering Pitch Lever

100%

Throttle

50%

H321

Normal

Hover

100%

Pitch

50%

H321

100%

Pitch

50%

H321

100%

Pitch

50%

H321

100%

Pitch

50%

H321

100%

Throttle

50%

H321

100%

Throttle

50%

H321

Stunt 1

Acrobatics

Stunt 2

Throttle

Hold

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 102

103

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

INVERTED SWITCH

6.11

The function of the Inverted Flight function

electronically reverses several control operations to

enable you to fly a helicopter much more easily.

The Inverted switch function is seldom used for 3D

flying as it was originally designed for. It is recom-

mended that the Inverted function not be used for 3D

flying, as it is a better method to learn 3D flying

without the aid of this type of function.

When the inverted flight switch (located at the top left

front portion of the Transmitter) is pulled forward, the

Inverted Flight function is switched on. The inverted

point is the throttle position at which no collective

pitch change will take place when the Inverted Flight

function is operated. The higher the value, the further

the throttle/collective stick must be toward full throttle

position. The factory preset is 50% and is actually

somewhat less than hover throttle since the Inverted

Flight function is normally operated with the stick

toward the low-throttle position.

When the Invert Flight function is activated, collective,

rudder and elevator operations are reversed

automatically. For inverted hovering maneuvers, the

flight mode switch should be left in the N (Normal)

position. For inverted aerobatics maneuvers, it is

recommended that you set Up a pitch curve dedicated

to inverted flight. This is most often used in

conjunction with Flight mode switch position 2.

Press the Clear key to reset

the Inverted function to the

factory default position (off).

Offset Value

Accessing the Inverted Flight Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “INVRT” is

displayed on the upper left side of the LCD.

4. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the

right portion of the display from INH to 50.0%.

Pressing either of these keys again will change the

value in the appropriate direction. When the Inverted

Flight Function is active, the word “OFFSET” will

appear below “INVRT.” If the invert switch is

activated, the word “ON” will flash.

5. To access the Pitch Curve function, press the Down

key.

6. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press

the Up key.

7. To exit the Inverted Flight function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Caution: If you do not intend to use the

Inverted Flight function, leave this function’s

operation inhibited.

When the Inverted switch is

moved to the On position,

the word “ON” will appear

flashing on the LCD screen.

Revolution Mixing

Pitch Curve

Function

Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate

the Inverted function and to adjust

the offset value as needed.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 103

104 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

REVOLUTION MIXING (NON-HEADING LOCK GYROS ONLY)

6.12

The Revolution Mixing function mixes tail rotor with

the Throttle and Pitch Curve functions to counteract

torque from the main rotor blades. When set up

correctly, the helicopter should climb and descend

without a tendency to yaw in either direction. Because

torque reaction varies with different power settings, it

is necessary to vary the tail rotor pitch at the same

time. The X-378 offers two separate revolution mixing

programs, with independent up and down mixing for

each - one for Flight mode position N and the other

for Stunt-1 and Stunt-2 positions. The U (Up) mixing

adjusts the tail rotor compensation for the mid to

high throttle setting and the D, or down, mixing

adjusts the tail rotor compensation for the mid to low

throttle setting. Thus, if you were to move the throttle

from the low to high position, the tail rotor servo

would move from D through Hover (mid) and to the U

setting.

When a value is entered, a left or right

facing arrow will appear on the LCD

screen to indicate the mix direction

Press the Clear

key to reset to the

factory default

position (0%).

Note: If the Throttle Stick is in the

current position being adjusted

(Example: Low stick, down (D) mix,

the letters “U” or “D” will flash)

Accessing the Revolution Mixing Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function Mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “RVO-U”

appears at the upper portion of the LCD.

4. Pressing the Channel key will select Up (U) or down

(D) mix and theflight mode switch position. When

the flight mode switch is in the displayed position

and the throttle stick is in the displayed position,

these two characters will flash. For example, when

the screen displays “RVO-U, NORMAL, 0%” and the

Flight mode switch is in the N position with the

throttle below half, the “U” will flash.

5. Press the (+) key to increase the right tail

compensation or press the (-) key to increase the left

compensation. Press the Clear key to reset to 0%.

6. This setup procedure can be used for revolution

mixing for either flight mode switch position N or 1

and 2. Switch position 1 or 2 should be used for

forward and/or inverted compensation.

7. To access the Inverted Flight function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Gyro Gain function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Revolution Mixing function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Gyro Gain Function

Inverted Function

Press Channel to access the various

up/down revolution mixing value

positions as shown to the left of the

LCD screen art above.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to adjust the

mixing values as

needed.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 104

105

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Setting Up Revolution Mixing

Set up the helicopter so that it will hover with the

tail rotor trim centered. Establish the helicopter into

a stable hover, then steadily increase the throttle to

initiate a steady climb. The body of the helicopter

will move in the opposite direction to the main rotor

rotation. Increase the U, or Up, setting until the

helicopter climbs with no tendency to turn. At a safe

altitude, close the throttle; the helicopter will

descend and the body will turn in the same direction

as the main rotor rotation. Increase the D, or down,

mix until the helicopter descends with no tendency

to turn. Throttle stick movements should be slow,

and the initial acceleration and deceleration swings

should be ignored.

When throttle is in the hold position (autorotation),

revolution and acceleration mixings are off. The

Acceleration Mixing function is provided to

compensate for the main rotor acceleration (and

deceleration) torque. The magnitude and duration of

the signal to the tail rotor depends Upon the rate of

the throttle changes. Thus, quick, jerky throttle

inputs will yield more noticeable tail compensation.

Note: The Revolution Mix function must be

established before an accurate acceleration

mix can be achieved, and the gyro should be

switched off.

Accessing the Acceleration Mixing Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function Mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “RVO-U”

appears at the center of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until “ACC.” appears at the

center of the LCD.

5. Using the (+) or (-) key, increase or decrease the

acceleration mix until no tail swing is noticed when

the throttle is increased or decreased abruptly.

6. To access the Inverted function, press the Down key.

7. To access the Gyro Gain function, press the Up key.

8. To exit the Revolution Mixing function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 105

106 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

GYRO GAIN FUNCTION

6.13

The X-378 offers two different types of Gyro Sensitivity

Adjustments: manual or automatic. This feature gives

the user the choice of selecting gyro sensitivity

through the rudder dual rate switch(AUX-2) or

automatically through the flight mode switch. If you

do not intend to use this function, leave this

operation at the factory default position (off).

Gyro gain value

Press the Clear key to

inhibit the gyro gain

function or to reset the

values to the factory

default settings.

Accessing the Gyro Gain Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “GYRO”

appears at the center of the LCD.

4. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the Gyro Gain

function. The name on the display will change from

GYRO to a flashing “GYR-0.”

5. Press the Channel key to select the function to be

adjusted

6. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate and adjust the

settings of the Gyro Gain function.

7. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Programmable Mixing function,

press the Up key.

7. To exit the Gyro Gain function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Gyro Gain

position 0 Position to be adjusted

Programmable Mixing

Revolution

Mixing

Press Channel to select function to be

changed/adjusted (Switch position,

Function, Gain Value).

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to activate and

adjust the settings of

the Gyro Gain function.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 106

107

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Manual Gyro Sensitivity Adjustment

Manual gyro sensitivity adjustment allows the pilot

to select from two different gyro sensitivities during

all flight conditions. This function is activated in

conjunction with the rudder dual rate(AUX-2) switch.

1 Select the position for gyro sensitivity by pressing

Channel key. “GYR-0” will be flashing. Select the Gyro

Gain position 0 or 1 by pressing (+) or (-) key.

2. Select the type of sensitivity adjustments by

pressing the Channel key once. The letter “N” or “A”

will now also be flashing at the upper right portion of

the LCD. “N” is for manual (AUX 2 switch) and “A” for

Automatic (Flight mode switch).

3 For manual operation, select the N by pressing (+)

or (-) key.

4 Press the Channel key once again and you will see

a right arrow flashing at the lower left portion of the

LCD. This indicates that you can now adjust the gain

value for the 0 AUX 2 switch position by using the (+)

or (-)keys.

Manual Gyro Gain (Aux 2 Switch Activation) Positions

Switch Position for Gyro Sensitivity Type of Sensitivity Adjustment

0 and 1 N for manual

A for Automatic

Gyro Sensitivity Range 0 to 100%

1. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press

the Down key.

2. To access the Programmable Mixing function,

press the Up key.

3. To exit the Gyro Gain function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 107

108 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Automatic Gyro Sensitivity Adjustment

Automatic gyro sensitivity adjustment feature allows

the pilot to automatically alter the sensitivity of the

gyro from either of two pre-determined settings

through the use of the flight mode switch. As different

flight modes are selected, the gyro’s sensitivity rate

will switch to the predetermined compensation rate

for each particular flight mode in use.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default positions.

Gain position

(0 or 1)

Activating the Automatic Gyro Gain Function

1 To activate the Automatic Gyro Gain function, press

the Channel key once. The letter “N” or “A” will now also

be flashing at the upper right portion of the LCD. “N”

is for manual (Aux 2 switch) and “A” for Automatic

(Flight mode switch).

2 For Automatic operation, select the “A” by pressing

(+) or (-) key.

3 Press the Channel key once again and you will see a

right arrow flashing at the lower left portion of the

LCD. This indicates that you can now adjust the gain

value for the 0 gain position by using the (+) or (-)

keys.

4 To adjust the gain position 1, press the Channel key

until the word “GYR-0” is flashing on the screen.

Next, press the (+) or (-) keys and the screen will

change to read “GYR-1.” Press the Channel key twice

until there is a flashing right arrow at the bottom left

of the screen. This indicates that you can now adjust

the gain value for the 1 gain position by using the (+)

or (-) keys.

5 To adjust the gain positions (0 or 1) for each flight

mode, press the Channel key until “GYR-0” or “GYR-1”

is flashing on the LCD. Next, press the (=) or (-) keys

until the word “G.NOR” (normal mode) is displayed.

6 Next, press the Channel key twice until the flashing

right arrow at the bottom left of the LCD is present.

7 Press the (+) or (-) keys to change the Gain

position from the 0 to 1 position as needed.

Repeat Steps 5 through 7 above to select the gain

positions (0 or 1) for each of the remaining flight

modes.

Flight mode position to

be adjusted

Automatic (A) or

Manual (N)

function selected

Programmable Mixing

Revolution Mixing

Press Channel to select position to be

adjusted ( Flight Mode, Function, Values).

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to select the

Flight mode position,

and to adjust the gain

position and values.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 108

109

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

To Access the Automatic Gyro Gain Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function Mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “GYRO”

appears at the center of the LCD.

4. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the Gyro Gain

function. The name on the display will change from

“GYRO” to a flashing “GYR-0.”

5. Press the Channel key so that the 0 and N letters

are flashing on the LCD screen.

6. Press the (+) or (-) keys. The “N” on the screen will

change to “A,” indicating that the Automatic Gyro

Gain function has been selected.

7. To access the Revolution Mixing function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Programmable Mixing function,

press the Up key.

9. To exit the Gyro Gain function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Flight Modes Recommended Gyro Gain positions

Normal (G.NOR) 0

Stunt (G.STN) 1

Hold (G.HLD) 1

Inverted(G.INV) 1

Gyro Remote Gain Connections: JR G460T and Other

Remote Gain Gyros Connect the white connector to from the G460T to

the AUX2 channel of the receiver.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 109

110 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

PROGRAMMABLE MIXING 1-3

6.14

The X-378 offers three programmable mixes to be

used for any number of different purposes. This

function allows mixing any one channel to any other

channel to make the aircraft easier to fly. This mix can

be set in the computer and remain on at all times or

switched on and off in flight using a number of

different switches. Each channel of this radio is

identified by a number. The chart below indicates the

channel and its corresponding number. These

numbers are used to establish the mixes. The number

appearing first is known as the “master channel” or

the channel to which you want to mix. The second

number is known as the “slave channel” or the

channel that is being mixed into the master. For

example, 2-1 would indicate aileron-to-throttle

mixing. Thus, each time the aileron stick is moved,

the throttle will increase or decrease based on the

value of the input. Mixing is proportional, so small

inputs of the master channel will produce small

outputs of the slave channel.

Note that when using any programmable mix

coupled to the throttle channel of the X-378,

it will be necessary to increase the high

throttle travel position of the channel to the

maximum 150% to prevent over-traveling of

the throttle by the addition of the

programmable mix.

Each programmable mix has a mixing “offset.” The

purpose of the mixing offset is to redefine the neutral

position of the slave channel.

CLR

Press to activate and select master

mixing channel assignment.

Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “MIX” and

the number “1” appears at the upper right portion of

the LCD.

4. Press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the mix.

5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the master

channel.

6. Press the Channel key and then the (+) or (-) keys

to select the slave channel.

7. Press the Channel key until a flashing arrow

appears at the bottom right portion of the LCD. This

left/right or up/down arrow indicates the current stick

position of the master channel.

8. Move the master stick to the left/right or up/down

position to be adjusted, and then use the (+) or (-)

keys to assign the desired mixing values.

Press to select

Programmable

Mix #2 and #3.

Gyro Gain

function

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 110

111

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Assigning the Mix Activation

The programmable mixes can be turned on and off in

flight using a variety of different switches. The chart

below lists the indication seen on the LCD display

and its definition. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will

change the mixing On/Off switches.

Note: When the particular switch selected is in

the Off position, the mixing value will indicate

“Off.“

Master channel

selected

Slave channel

selected

Master stick

position to be

adjusted

Programmable

Mixes 2 and 3

Gyro Gain

Function

Mix Value

On or Off

Press Channel to select function

to be adjusted (Master/Slave/Mix

Value/Switch Selection).

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to adjust channel

selection, mixing

values, and activation

switch positions.

Press Clear to

reset to factory

default settings.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 111

112 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Selecting the Mix Activation Switch

1. Press the Channel key once. The letters “ON,” as

well as a smaller “SW” will appear at the center of

the LCD.

2. Press the (+) or (-) keys to assign the mix

activation to the options shown at right:

Program Mix #1

ON: Always on

F-NR: Flight mode normal only

(Activated by the flight mode switch)

F-S12: Flight Modes 1 and 2 only

(Activated by the flight mode switch)

F-S2: Flight Mode 2 only

(Activated by the flight mode switch)

Program Mix #2

ON: Always on

Hold: Throttle Hold only

(Activated by the Throttle Hold switch)

F-S12: Flight Modes 1 and 2 only (Activated by the

flight mode switch)

GEAR: Activated by the Gear switch

Program Mix #3

ON: Always on

Hold: Throttle Hold only

(Activated by the Throttle Hold switch)

F-S12: Flight Modes 1 and 2 only (Activated by the

flight mode switch)

GEAR: Activated by the Gear switch

Press the Clear key to reset to 0. Note: The master

channel trim must be centered for this to reset to

0 using the Clear key.

10. Press the Down key to access the Gyro Gain

function.

11. Press the Up key to access the Programmable Mix

#2 and #3.

12. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

exit the Programmable Mixing function.

Note: With a little practice, programmable

mixing will be very easy compared to the

first time you try it. Remember, the beauty

of a computer radio is, if you don’t like

something, you can change it. Mixing is

only limited by your imagination.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 112

113

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Programmable Mixing Offsets

Any stick position of the master channel can be

determined as the basic center point of mixing. The

basic point is the position of the master channel

stick, control switch, or knob where you set the mix

value and the direction of mixing.

To set the basic point of mixing, hold the master

channel in the desired position and press the Clear

key. The display will indicate offset value from

neutral; however, mixing value at the determined

position would indicate zero.

When properly adjusted, your heli should track

across the sky at full speed with no correction

needed. The X-378 has three programmable mixes

that can free mix any two channels. Following are

some examples of where this free mixing is used.

Pitch-to-Elevator Mixing

At full throttle, fast forward flight, most helicopters

pitch either up or down. The X-378 has active digital

trims in each flight mode to correct this. However, at

intermediate speeds (e.g., 5/8 throttle) this pitching

tendency is reduced.

Many top pilots use a combination of elevator stunt

trim and Pitch-to-Elevator Mixing. Mix pitch (channel

6) to Elevator (channel 3) and select switch position 1,

2 so that the mixing is turned on in Flight mode 1 and 2.

Then, hover your helicopter. Using forward cyclic

only, push your heli into forward flight, but don’t

change the pitch or throttle settings. After

transitioning into forward flight, notice the direction

the nose pitches. Correct this with stunt trim elevator

until no pitching occurs at this throttle pitch setting.

Finally, fly your helicopter at full throttle/pitch in fast

forward flight. If the nose pitches up, feed in down

pitch to elevator mixing until straight flight is

achieved. When properly adjusted, the heli will fly

straight and level, hands off, at all throttle pitch

settings.

Rudder-to-Throttle Mixing

During 540 stall turns and fast pirouettes, the tail

rotor absorbs power and the main rotor rpm decays.

This can be compensated for by mixing rudder-to-

throttle so that when rudder is applied, the throttle

is advanced. It usually takes about 15% right mixing

and 10% left mixing.

Please note that when using any programmable mix

coupled to the throttle channel of the X-378, it will

be necessary to increase the high throttle travel

position of the channel to the maximum 150% to

prevent over-traveling of the throttle by the addition

of the programmable mix.

Aileron-to-Throttle Mixing

When doing a roll or at anytime hard-over cyclic is

used, the main rotor’s rpm can decay due to

increased loads. A way around this is to mix aileron

to throttle so that when the aileron is displaced,

throttle is added. Use about 10-30 % in both

directions.

Please note that when using any programmable mix

coupled to the throttle channel of the X-378, it will

be necessary to increase the high throttle travel

position of the channel to the maximum 150% to

prevent over-traveling of the throttle by the addition

of the programmable mix.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 113

114 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

PCM FAIL-SAFE/HOLD FUNCTION

6.15

The Fail-Safe/Hold function is available only when

you use the XP-783 transmitter in either of the PCM

modulations: S-PCM or Z-PCM. This function is

designed to help minimize damage to your aircraft

during a loss of signal to the receiver. The servos

either assume the fail-safe presets or hold their last

good signal position.

Note: In the PCM modulations, the Fail-

Safe/Hold function cannot be totally disabled

so that the servos will react to interference in

the same way as they do in a PPM system. This

is only possible with the use of a PPM receiver

and the transmitter in the PPM modulation.

Since the actual screen appearance varies

depending on the modulation of your radio,

refer to the appropriate modulation section

which follows. As noted earlier, if you are in

the PPM modulation, the Fail-Safe/Hold

function is not applicable. Therefore, the Fail-

Safe/Hold function will not appear on your

LCD in the PPM mode. Refer to the

Modulation Selection section for more

information pertaining to the broadcast signal

of your XP-783 helicopter transmitter.

Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in Z-PCM

Modulation Hold (Z-PCM) The Hold function is

automatically activated when the radio is turned on

and is in the Z-PCM modulation. This function stops

(or holds) the servos in the positions they were in just

prior to the interference. Therefore, your aircraft

maintains the position held immediately before the

interference was experienced. When a clear signal is

restored, the Hold function releases and control of

the airplane returns to you.

Accessing the PCM Hold Function (Z-PCM)

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On

(upper) position.

2. While the power switch is in the On position, press

the Up and Down keys simultaneously to access the

Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FAL.S” (Fail-

Safe) appears in the left portion of your LCD.

Note: If “FAL.S” does not appear on your

LCD, it is because you are transmitting in

PPM. Fail-Safe is not applicable in the PPM

mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode

Selection section for more information.

You should never attempt to adjust the Fail-

Safe function when the aircraft is running.

When the Fail-Safe function is activated (i.e., when the

signal is interrupted), the transmitter automatically

moves each servo to a preset position. The position

that each servo assumes is determined by you, as is

the time length of interference that must occur before

servo movement.

After the interference has ceased, control of the aircraft

returns immediately to you. There are three time delays

to choose from: 1/3 second, 1/2 second and 1.0 second.

These time delays are the amount of time it takes,

starting the moment the interference occurs, until the

servos assume their preset positions.

Move the control sticks to

the desired HOLD position,

then press Clear to store

these positions.

Trainer Function

Programmable Mix 3

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

select the desired hold delay time.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 114

115

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Setting the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in Z-PCM Modulation

1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, adjust the

Fail-Safe presets.

2. Select among the three time delays (.25, .50 or 1.0

second), by pressing (+) or (-) key until the

appropriate delay appears on the screen.

3. Hold the transmitter sticks in the positions that

you want the servos to assume during signal loss

conditions. You can determine fail-safe preset

positions for the other channels by placing the

potentiometers and switches in the positions that

you want them to assume during interference.

5. With the sticks, switches and potentiometers in

the Fail-Safe positions, touch the Clear key. This will

enter these locations as the fail-safe memory settings.

6. To confirm that the input of data was successful,

switch the transmitter off. The controls will move to

the input locations. If not, repeat Step 5 again.

7. To access the Programmable Mix 3 function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Fail-Safe function, press the Up and

Down keys simultaneously.

Note: These preset positions remain stored

in the transmitter’s memory until both the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium back

up battery have been removed (or until data

reset has been performed). Therefore, you do

not have to reset the Fail-Safe each time you

fly. Should you want to re-adjust the Fail-Safe

presets, access the Fail-Safe function and

adjust the presets as you have just done. The

transmitter automatically recalls the settings

for the last Fail-Safe adjustment.

Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in S-PCM Modulation

Press the Clear key to store

the Fail-Safe servo positions

for all channels set to F.S.

The Hold function is automatically activated when the

radio is turned on and is in the S-PCM modulation.

This function stops (or holds) the servos in the

positions they were in just prior to the interference.

Therefore, your aircraft maintains the position held

immediately before the interference was experienced.

When a clear signal is restored, the Hold function

releases, and control of the aircraft returns to you.

Fail-Safe channel to

be programmed

Trainer Function

Programmable Mix 3

Press Channel to select

the desired channel to

be programmed.

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to select the Hold (HO)

or Fail-Safe (F.S.) modes

for each channel.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 115

116 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On

(upper) position.

2. While the power switch is in the On position, press

the Up and Down keys simultaneously to access the

Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FAL.S”

appears in the left portion of your LCD.

Note: If “FAL.S” does not appear on your LCD, it

is because you are transmitting in PPM. Fail-

Safe is not applicable in the PPM mode. Refer

to the Modulation Mode Selection section for

more information.

Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in S-PCM Modulation

Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modulation

The XP-783 allows you to combine the Hold and Fail-

Safe presets for all seven channels on the receiver;

you can select Fail-Safe or Hold independently for all

channels on your aircraft. Some channels will hold

their last clear signal position, while others assume

the preset position. Once the Fail-Safe has been

activated by signal interruption (interference), the

transmitter automatically moves the servos to a

preset position.

The predetermined servo positions are set by you. In

the S-PCM Fail-Safe, the time delay (the amount of

time it takes, starting the moment the interference

occurs, until the servos assume the preset positions)

is fixed at .25 seconds. After the interference has

ceased, normal operation of the aircraft returns to

you immediately.

Setting Fail-Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modulation

1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, it is time to

adjust the fail-safe presets.

2. Select all of the channels for which you want to

enter a fail-safe preset. To do so, use the Channel key

until the appropriate channel number appears on the

LCD. We will use only channel 2 (aileron) for our

example. The display will appear as follows:

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key. This will change the

display from hold to the Fail-Safe preset display.

Note: Your LCD may display a number on

the right side. This number is the previous

fail-safe preset of the stick, switch, and

potentiometer position of your transmitter at

last fail-safe memorization. The display will

appear as follows:

4. Next, press the Up key one time. Once again your

display will change. It will appear as:

5. Hold the appropriate transmitter control stick

(potentiometer or switch) in the desired location and

press the Clear key. This will enter the location as the

fail-safe memory setting for the relative channel.

Continuing our example, hold the aileron stick to the

right and press the Clear key.

6. Press the Down key. Your Fail-Safe preset value will

be displayed on the LCD.

Note: Values will change between

transmitters. In our example, the screen

would appear as follows:

7. To confirm that the input of data was successful to

the applicable channels, switch the transmitter off.

The respective channels will move to the input

locations.

8. To access the Mixing B function, press the

Down key.

9. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Fail-Safe/Hold function, press the

Up and Down keys simultaneously.

Note: These preset positions remain stored

in the transmitter’s memory until both the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium

backup battery have been removed (or until

the Data Reset function has been utilized).

Therefore, you do not have to reset the Fail-

Safe each time you fly. Should you want to

re-adjust the Fail-Safe preset position,

access the Fail-Safe function once again and

adjust the presets as you have just done. The

transmitter automatically recalls the settings

for the latest Fail-Safe adjustment.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 116

117

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

TRAINER SYSTEM

6.16

The X-378 transmitter employs two separate types of

trainer systems:

1. Normal Trainer System - All functions are

controlled by either the master transmitter or the

slave transmitter

2. Programmable Function Trainer Stick functions may

be assigned to the slave one at a time. Since the control

functions can be transferred one at a time, students can

concentrate on only one function at a time until they

are competent to fly solo.

Accessing the Programmable Trainer Function

1. Move the transmitter switch to the On

(Upper) position.

2. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press the Up or Down key until “TRN.” appears on

the left portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key to select the channel

indicated just to the right of the TRN.

5. Once the channel appears that you want to make a

slave, press the (+) or (-) key. This will change the

display from “NORM” to “SLAV.” If you want to make

more slave channels, press the Channel key until the

next desired channel is shown and press the (+) or

(-) key.

6. To change the Programmable Trainer function back

to normal system, press the Clear key.

7. To access the Fail-Safe function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Timer function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Trainer function, press the Up and Down

keys simultaneously.

CLR

Trainer function

type selected

Timer Function

Fail Safe

Function

Press Clear to reset

the factory default

settings.

Press Channel to select the desired

channel to be programmed.

Press the + or - keys to

change the settings of

each channel.

Current trainer mode

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 117

118 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Basic Connections and Conditions for Training

1. The slave transmitter must be PPM (Pulse Position

Modulation) with a DSC (Direct Servo Control) jack.

If the slave transmitter is PPM/PCM selectable, select

PPM. The master transmitter can be PCM or PPM.

2. Plug the trainer cord (optional part #JRPA130) into

each transmitter’s DSC jack.

Note: Each transmitter will appear to be on,

but neither is actually transmitting at this time.

3. Switch the master transmitter on. Do not switch

on the slave transmitter; it is only necessary to have

the master transmitter on.

Note: If the master transmitter is the XP-783,

its LCD will indicate “TRN.M” (Trainer Master)

when the power switch is on.

4. Pull the trainer switch toward you to transfer

control to the slave. Releasing the switch

automatically reverts to the master transmitter.

5. Be sure the slave transmitter’s servo reversing,

dual rates, end-point adjustment and trims are

identical to the master transmitter. This can be

checked by pulling the trainer switch toward you. If

the control surfaces move, adjust the slave

transmitter until the trainer switch can be activated

without a change of the control surface position.

Use of the Normal Trainer System

In this mode, all functions are switched from the

master to the slave using the trainer switch. This is

the Normal mode; no function setup is necessary to

activate this system.

Use of the Programmable Trainer Function (PTF)

In this mode, the master may assign functions to the

student one at a time to make learning to fly easier.

The master may assign the slave rudder

and elevator. Then, when the trainer switch is

activated (pulled forward), the slave has control of

rudder and elevator only while the master retains

control of throttle and aileron.

Note: When all channels are set to master,

the Trainer System becomes Normal.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 118

119

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

TIMER FUNCTION

6.17

The X-378 offers two separate types of Timer

functions: Countdown and Stopwatch. The

Countdown Timer time is input in 10 second intervals

up to 35 minutes. The timer can be set for each

individual model and retained in memory.

In order for the Timer function to be activated, it must

be in the Normal display. From the Normal display,

pressing the Channel key will change the left side of

the LCD from the model name to the Timer function.

The timer is now started and stopped by pressing

either the (+) or (-) key. It can also be started and

stopped using the snap roll/trainer switch at the left-

rear portion of the transmitter. When the X-378 is

being used as the master transmitter in the Training

function the trainer switch will not operate the timer

start/stop function.

Note: In the Countdown mode, the

transmitter will beep three times: 30 seconds,

two times at 20 seconds, and beep one time

every second from :10 to 0. At zero there will

be a continuous tone for 1 second and then

the timer will begin counting up with a (+)

indication to the left of the time value. When

used as the stop-watch, the timer will count

up to 44 minutes 59 seconds, at which time it

will reset to zero and continue to count.

Accessing the Timer Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously to

enter the Function Mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TIMR” is

displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

4. The “STP.W” in the right portion of the display

indicates the timer is in the Stopwatch (count-up)

mode.

5. Pressing the (+) key will change the display to :10

each time the (+) is pressed, and the value will

increase in 10 second intervals Up to 35:00 minutes.

This is the Countdown Timer value. Pressing the

Clear key will reset the Countdown Timer to the

Stopwatch mode.

6. To access the Trainer function, press the Down key.

7. To access the Integral Timer function, press the Up key.

8. To exit the Timer function, press the Up and Down

keys simultaneously.

Note: The Countdown Timer and Stopwatch can

not operate simultaneously; If the Countdown

Timer is set, the stopwatch is inhibited; if the

Countdown Timer is inhibited, the stopwatch is

defaulted to.The function of the Integral Timer

is to keep track of the accumulated time in use.

The Integral Timer counts up to 100 hours in

one-minute increments. It is best to reset this

timer each time the transmitter is recharged.

The timer will then indicate the time of use on

that particular charge.

Timer Option Selected

Timer Value Set

Servo Reversing

Trainer Function Press Channel to select timer options

(Off, Down-Timer, Stop Watch).

Press the (+) or = keys to

increase or decrease the

time value.

Press Clear to reset the down

timer value to the factory

default position (10:00).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 119

120 X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Helicopter

Accessing the Integral Timer Function

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Up and Down keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “INT.T” is

displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

4. The accumulated time of use will be displayed in

the right portion of the LCD. To reset, press the Clear

key. Note that the colon (:) flashes at a frequency of

once per second.

5. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.

6. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Up key.

7. To exit the Integral Timer unction, press the Up

and Down keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 120

121

X-378 MANUAL Helicopter

CHAPTER 7:DATA SHEET • Helicopter

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 121

122 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

1. THRO Spoiler Channel

2. AILE Left Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel (right aileron channel—AILE 2)

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel (left flap channel for dual flaps)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel (right flap channel for dual flaps)

RECEIVER CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT/THROTTLE ALT1.2

CONTROL IDENTIFICATION AND LOCATION

Sailplane Version Transmitter

1.1

SECTION IV • CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane

This function makes the throttle stick trim active only

when the throttle stick is at less than half throttle, which allows for fine adjustment of the spoilers with

the throttle stick in the lower position.

Throttle ALT

Spoiler/Rudder

Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Crow Switch

Flap Mixing

Switch Flap (Aileron)

Trim Lever

Timer/Trainer

Button

Aileron D/R

Switch

Rudder DR

Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Spoiler

Trim Lever

Flapperon/

Flap Trim

Lever

Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Neck Strap Eyelett

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 122

123

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Rudder/Throttle

Control Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever

Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll

Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Gear Switch

Flap Mix Switch Flap Lever Snap

Roll/Timer

Trainer/Button

Aileron

D/R Switch

Rudder DR

Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/

Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Throttle

Trim Lever

AUX 2

Lever

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel (Flap)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel (Spoiler)

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

Helicopter Version Transmitter–Airplane Mode

1. THRO Throttle Channel

2. AILE Aileron Channel

3. ELEV Elevator Channel

4. RUDD Rudder Channel

5. GEAR Gear Channel

6. AUX 1 Auxiliary 1 Channel (Pitch)

7. AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Channel

(Gyro Sensitivity)

CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT

Helicopter Version Transmitter–Heli Mode

Throttle/Rudder

Stick

Digital Rudder

Trim Lever

Digital Aileron

Trim Lever

Up/Down

Scroll Buttons

Channel Key

On/Off

Switch

Gear Switch

Flight Mode

Switch Hover Throttle

Lever

Timer/Trainer

Button

Throttle Kill

Button

Rudder DR

Switch

Digital Elevator

Trim Lever

Aileron/Elevator

Control Stick

Increase/Decrease

Programming Buttons

Clear Key

Neck Strap Eyelett

LCD Display

Elevator DR

Switch

Digital Throttle

Trim Lever

Hover Pitch

Lever

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 123

124 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

TRANSMITTER REAR1.3

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane

TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL

DSC/ TRAINER JACK

CHARGING JACK FOR

NI-CD BATTERY ONLY

(8N-550)

SPOILERS TENSION SCREW

ELEVATOR TENSION SCREW

AILERON TENSION SCREW

RUDDER TENSION SCREW

Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice

The Federal Communications Commission (FFC) requires that

changes in transmitter frequency must be performed only by an

authorized service technician (Horizon Service Center). Any

transmitter frequency change made by non-certified technician

may result in a violation of the FCC rules.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 124

125

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

DIRECT SERVO CONTROL (DSC)1.6

CONTROL STICK LENGTH ADJUSTMENT1.4

To adjust the stick length, use the 2mm Allen wrench

(supplied with your X-378 transmitter) to unlock the

set screw.

Note: Turn the wrench counterclockwise to

loosen the screw. Then, turn the stick clockwise

to shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen.

After the control stick length has been adjusted to

suit your flying style, tighten the 2mm set screw. If

you desire longer sticks, JR offers a thicker stick

(JRPA047) that is approximately one inch longer than

the standard stick. This stick, crafted from bar stock

aluminum, is available at your local JR dealer.

For proper DSC hook-up and operation:

1. Leave the transmitter power switch in the Off

position. The transmitter will not transmit any radio

frequency (RF) in this position.

2. Plug the DSC cord (supplied) into the DSC port in

the rear of the transmitter.

3. The encoder section of the transmitter will now be

operational, and the LCD display will be lit.

4. Plug the other end of the DSC cord into the

receiver charge receptacle. Turn the switch harness

to the On position. When you install the charging

jack, be sure to hook the charging jack receptacle

securely into the switch harness charge cord.

Why you should use the DSC function:

1. The DSC enables you to check the control surfaces

of your aircraft without drawing the fully operational

200mAh from your transmitter battery pack. Instead,

you will only draw 70mAh when using the DSC

function.

2. The DSC function allows you to make final

adjustments to your airplane without transmitting

any radio signals. Therefore, if another pilot is flying

on your frequency, you can still adjust your aircraft

and not interfere with the other pilot’s aircraft.

Note: Under no circumstances should you

attempt to fly your aircraft with the DSC cord

plugged in! This function is for bench-

checking your airplane only.

A—Charge Cord/DSC Receptacle

B—Switch Harness Lead

C—Charger/DCS Cord

CHAPTER 1:SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS • Sailplane

CONTROL STICK TENSION ADJUSTMENT1.5

Remove the Ni-Cd battery and six transmitter back

screws as shown on previous page). Pull the

transmitter crystal and then remove the transmitter

back, being careful not to cause damage to any of the

components.

Adjust each screw for desired tension

(counterclockwise to loosen stick feel, clockwise to

tighten stick feel). When adjusting the throttle ratchet

tension, make sure that the adjusting screw does not

touch the PC board after adjustment is complete.

SET SCREW

LOOSEN

TIGHTEN

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 125

126 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 1:CONNECTIONS • Sailplane

NECK STRAP ATTACHMENT1.7

An eyelet is provided on the face of the X-378

transmitter that allows you to connect a Neck Strap

(JRPA023). This hook has been positioned so that

your transmitter has the best possible balance when

you use the neck strap.

Note: Double-check to ensure that the neck

strap is securely fastened to the transmitter.

BASE LOADED ANTENNA1.8

An optional Base-Loaded Antenna is available for

use with the X-378 transmitter. It is considerably

shorter than the standard antenna. However, the

base loaded antenna cannot be collapsed for storage

inside the transmitter. You must also use an adaptor

(JRPA156) to attach the antenna to your

X-378. The Base Loaded Antenna (JRPA155) is made

of a flexible coil and is covered with a soft plastic

material. Your range will not be affected when using

the base loaded antenna.

FREQUENCY NOTES/AIRCRAFT ONLY FREQUENCIES1.9

The X-378 transmitter employs a plug-in crystal for

transmitter that is glued in place at the time of

shipment. Per FCC regulation, the transmitter crystal

should only be changed by a certified technician.

Changing of the transmitter crystal by a non

authorized technician could result in a violation

of FCC rules.

The X-378 can transmit in either Pulse Code

Modulation (PCM) or Pulse Position Modulation

(PPM, commonly referred to as FM).

Be certain to observe the following guidelines:

1. Do not operate your transmitter when another

transmitter is using the same frequency, regardless

of whether the second transmitter is PCM, PPM (FM)

or AM. You can never operate two transmitters on

the same frequency simultaneously without causing

interference to both receivers and crashing both

aircraft.

2. For operation of your X-378 with additional

receivers, you should refer to the receiver

compatibility chart. The chart is located in the

Modulation Selection Section of this manual.

Aircraft-Only Frequencies

JR RF modules and receivers are available in 72MHz

frequencies in the United States for use with model

aircraft. Employing 72MHz frequencies does not

require a special operator’s license from the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC).

* A chart for all available frequencies is located

on page 185 of this manual.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 126

127

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 2:CONNECTIONS • Sailplane

It is extremely important that your radio system be

correctly installed in your model. Here are a few

suggestions on the installation of your JR equipment:

1. Wrap the receiver in protective foam rubber that

is no less than 3/8 inch thick. Secure the foam to the

receiver with #64 rubber bands. This protects the

receiver in the event of a crash or a very hard

landing.

2. The servos should be mounted using rubber

grommets and brass bushings to isolate them from

vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws;

this will negate the vibration absorption effect of the

rubber grommets. The diagram

on the right will assist you in

properly mounting

your servo.

The brass bushings are pushed from the bottom up

in the rubber grommets. When the servo screw is

tightened securely, it provides the proper security as

well as the proper vibration isolation for your servo.

3. The servos must be able to move freely over their

entire range of travel. Make sure that the control

linkages do not bind or impede the movement of any

of the servos.

4. Mount all switches away from the engine exhaust

and away from any high vibration areas. Make sure

the switch operates freely and is able to operate over

its full travel.

5. Mount the receiver antenna firmly to the airplane

to ensure that it will not become entangled in the

propeller or control surfaces.

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

CONNECTIONS2.2

2.1

4N600

4.8V 600mAh

JAPAN REMOTE CONTROL CO., LTD.

OFF

GEAR

7 CH 72MHz FM SLIMLINE

RECEIVER

ABC&W INTERFERENCE

PROTECTION SYSTEM

BATT

RUDD

ELEV

AILE

THRO

AUX1

RECEIVER BATTERY 4N-600

DELUXE SWITCH HARNESS

(JRPA0001)

CHARGE CORD OR

D.S.C. RECEPTACLE

(JRPS024)

CHARGE CORD OR D.S.C.

D.S.C.-(JRPA132)

CHARGER-(JRPC221)

R700 RECEIVER

AUXILIARY 2

GEAR

RUDDER

BATTERY

ELEVATOR

AUXILIARY 1

AILERON

THROTTLE/SPOILER

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 127

128 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 3:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

BATTERY ALARM AND DISPLAY

CHAPTER 4:ALARM AND ERROR DISPLAY • Sailplane

4.1

When the transmitter voltage drops below 9.0-volts

DC, the display flashes “BATT” and an alarm sounds seven times. If you are flying when this occurs, land

immediately.

KEY INPUT AND DISPLAY3

The Function Selection keys are used to move up and

down through the functions.The Channel key is used

to advance the channel or function selected. The

Increase and Decrease keys are used to make changes in

the selected functions.

Function Selection Keys

Down

Channel

Increase

Decrease

Clear/Store

Hereafter, explanation of all functions in this manual

will use the following designations to indicate

pressing individual keys:

UP DN

CLR

BACK-UP ERROR DISPLAY4.2

All preprogrammed data is protected by a five-year

lithium battery that guards against main transmitter

battery failure. Should the lithium battery fail, the

display will indicate ERR1 regardless of the position

of the On/Off switch. If this occurs, it will be

necessary to replace the battery and reprogram all

data. All transmitter programs will return to the

factory default settings, and the data you have input

will be lost. When it becomes necessary to replace

the lithium back-up battery, contact JR Horizon

Service Center. Due to the possibility of extensive

damage caused by improper removal or replacement,

only JR Horizon Service Center is authorized to make

this change.

(Press both keys at the same

time to enter or exit the

function mode.)

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 128

129

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

NORMAL DISPLAY5.1

When the power switch is in the On position, the

display will read as follows:

UP DN CH +CLR

DIRECT ACCESS DIGITAL TRIMS5.2

The X-378 is equipped with a Direct Access Digital

Trim Value function. When at the normal display, if a

digital trim lever is moved, the screen will

automatically change to show the current trim value

for the channel being adjusted. When the trim is

returned to center, the screen will change back to the

normal display screen after a few seconds.

Displays the current trim value for the

channel being adjusted

Modulation type Model Type

Model Number

Elevator Trim

Aileron TrimRudder Trim

Model Name

Throttle Trim

Battery/Voltage Indicators

To enter the System mode, press simultaneously then

turn on the power switch. To enter the Function model,

turn on the power switch, then press simultaneously.

Press the Clear key to reset

the timer.

In the Timer mode, press the

Channel key to Start/Stop the timer.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 129

130 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

1. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

2. Move the power switch to the On (upper) position.

3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the

menu and access the applicable function.

SYSTEM MODE5.3

To enter the System mode, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously, then turn the power

switch to the on position. The display will show the

last active program. Pressing either the Up or Down

key then scrolls through the functions one by one,

according to the System Mode flowchart shown at

the right. Once the appropriate function is displayed,

changes can be made by pressing the (+) or (-) keys.

System Mode Flowchart

Information pertaining to each function is explained

on the page listed next to the function name.

Functions will appear in the same order they are

shown on this chart.

Accessing the System Mode

Model

Selection pg.131

Model Name

Entry pg.133

Model Type

pg. 134

Data Reset

pg. 135

Modulation

Selection pg.136

Data Transfer

pg. 137

Trim Step

pg. 140

Wing Type

pg. 141

Flap/Spoiler

Lever Selection

pg. 143

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 130

131

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CLR

Accessing the Model Selection Function

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

The X-378 system offers memory for eight completely

separate models. Therefore, it is possible to have a

mixture of helicopter, airplane and sailplane setups

retained in memory. It is also recommended that the

Model Name Entry function be used in conjunction

with each model setup. Another very useful function

of the Model Selection function is the ability to set

one aircraft up several different ways. This is helpful

when multi-task performance is desired.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the

System mode.

2. Model should be flashing on the right top portion

of the LCD. If not, press the Up or Down key until

“Model” is displayed and flashing.

3. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will select among each

of the eight models available. Notice that as each

model is selected, its name appears in the left

portion of the LCD.

4. To access the Copy Selection function, press the

Channel key.

5. To access the Model Name Entry function, press

the Up key.

6. Once the desired model is displayed on the left,

pressing the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

will exit the Model Selection function and establish

the model displayed as the new current model.

Note: When changing from one model type to

another, it is not necessary to use the Type

Selection function. This is done automatically

by the computer.

MODEL SELECTION/MODEL COPY SELECT

5.4

“Model” flashing indicates

Model Select Function

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to select the

desired model.

Current Model

Name

Model Name

Entry Flap/Spoiler

Lever Selection

Copy

Selection

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 131

132 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Accessing the Copy Selection Function

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

CLR

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move

the transmitter’s power switch to the On position.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “Model”

appears flashing on the top right side of the LCD.

3. The number that appears below the flashing

“Model” is the current model. This is important to

note as only the current model will be the copied or

“from” model. It is imperative to retrieve the proper

current model prior to initiating the copy sequence.

Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the desired

model to be copied.

4. Press the Channel key once. The word “Copy” will

appear at the top left of the screen indicating that

the Copy function has been selected.

5. The large number (1–8) at the bottom center of the

LCD indicate the accepting model.

6. Press the Increase or Decrease keys to select the

accepting model number.

Note: Always make sure that the accepting

model is either free of input or one that you

no longer want to retain in your transmitter’s

memory. Once the copying process has been

completed, the information of the accepting

model is lost and the current model is input

as the new data.

7. Once the desired accepting model is selected,

press the Clear key to complete the Copy Selection

function. The model number at the bottom of the

screen will flash several times indicating that the

model copy function was successful. The “from” or

template model’s name and data will now replace

that of the accepting model.

8. To access the Flap/Spoiler Lever Select function,

press the Down key.

9. To access the Model Naming function, press the

Up key.

10. To exit the Copy Selection function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

The Copy Selection function enables you to copy all

of the settings of the current model to another

model within the same transmitter. This is very

useful when setting up one aircraft several different

ways or when trying an alternative set up of your

current model.

Model number

to be copied to

Model Copy Select

Press Clear to copy

current model to model

number shown at the

bottom of the LCD screen.

Model number to

be copied

Model Naming

Flap/Spoiler

Lever Select Press at Model

Select function

to access Copy

function.

Press Increase or

Decrease to select

model number to

be copied to.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 132

133

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Accessing the Model Name Entry Function

CLR

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

The X-378 allows a 3-digit name to be input for each

of the eight models available. The current model will

be displayed in the Normal display when the timer is

not active. You may also find this useful to identify

different aircraft setups.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On (upper) position to enter

the Model Setup mode.

2. Use the Model Selection function to select the

model you want to name. (Please refer to the Model

Selection section at this time.)

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the first digit

of the model to be named is flashing on the left

portion of the LCD.

4. The current name will be displayed in the left

portion of the LCD. Pressing the (+) or (-) key will

select the first alphanumeric character.

Note: The character being selected will flash.

5. Press the Channel key to advance the character

selection to the next character.

6. Repeat this procedure until all three characters are

selected.

7. To access the Model Selection function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Type Selection function, press the

Up key.

9. To exit the Model Name Entry function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

MODEL NAME ENTRY

5.5

Flashing first digit

indicates Model

Naming function and

current character to

be changed.

Clear Current

Character

Model Number

Model Type

Model Select

Digit Select

Characters

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 133

134 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

Accessing the Type Selection Function

The X-378 is capable of performing as a helicopter,

airplane or sailplane radio with full functions

for each.

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down keys until “Acro,” “Heli,”

or “Glid” is displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

3. Pressing either the (+) or (-) key will change the

type of model.

4. To access the Model Name Entry function, press

the Down key.

5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Up key.

6. To exit the Type Selection function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

MODEL TYPE SELECTION

5.6

CLR

Current Model Type

Model Naming

Model Type Data Reset Change

Model Type

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 134

135

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch

the transmitter to the On position to enter the Model

Setup mode.

2. Press the Up or Down key until “RESET” appears in

the center of the LCD display. Check the number at

the right side of the display to be sure the model

selected is the model you want to reset.

3. To reset data, press the Clear key.

4. To access the Type Selection function, press the

Down key.

5. To access the Modulation Selection function, press

the Up key.

6. To exit the Data Reset function, press both the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing the Data Reset Function

The Data Reset function permits you to reset all the

functions and settings for the current model to

factory conditions. Resetting does not affect the data

already programmed for other models. Be sure to

confirm that you need to reset the data of the

currently indicated model in order to prevent

accidental loss of your valuable data.

DATA RESET

5.7

CLR

Model number to

be reset

Press to data reset

current model.

Modulation Select

Model Type

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 135

136 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move

the power switch to the On position to access the

System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPCM,”

“ZPCM,” or “PPM” appears at the top of the LCD.

3. To change among the modulation types, press

either the (+) or (-) keys.

Note: When the Data Reset function is used,

the X-378 retains the current modulation

selected for each model. This means that the

modulation type does not change.

4. Pressing the Clear key will also reset the modulation

selection to the factory preset S-PCM.

5. To access the Data Reset function, press the Down key.

6. To access the Data Transfer function, press the Up key.

7. To exit the Modulation Selection function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Note: In the normal display, the selected

modulation type will appear in the middle of

the LCD.

Refer to the examples that follow for receiver

compatibility:

Accessing the Modulation Select Function

The Modulation Selection function enables your

X-378 to transmit to a variety of JR receivers that are

already, or may soon be, in existence. You can select

from either of two types of PCM, Z-PCM or S-PCM,

depending on the Central Processing Unit (CPU)

within your receiver or from linear PPM (Pulse

Position Modulation [FM]). Refer to the receiver

compatibility chart below for the correct modulation.

MODULATION SELECT

5.8

TX Modulation Compatible Receivers # of Channels &

Brief Description

PPM NER-226 6 (micro)

PPM NER-228 8

PPM (FM) NER-327x 7

PPM (FM) NER-527x 7 (micro)

PPM (FM) NER-529x 9 (micro)

PPM (FM) NER-549 9

PPM NER-600 6

PPM NER-610M 6

PPM NER-700M 7

TX Modulation Compatible Receivers # of Channels &

Brief Description

Z-PCM NER-236 6 (micro)

Z-PCM NER-627XZ or

627

“G” series

Z-PCM NER-J329P 9

Z-PCM NER-910XZ 10

S-PCM NER-955 10

S-PCM NER-D945 10

S-PCM NER-649S 9

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

Current Modulation

Reset to SPCM

Modulation

Data Transfer

Data Reset

Change

Modulation

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 136

137

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

The X-378’s Data Transfer function allows for a model

from one X-378 transmitter to be sent to another

X-378 transmitter by using a JR Trainer Cord

(JRPA130 sold separately).

Transmitting Transmitter: It will first be necessary

to select the desired model (1-8) to be transferred to

the receiving transmitter. Access the Model Select

function and select the desired model number to be

transferred (See section 5.4 for information)

DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION

5.9

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

Indicates that the DSC cord

needs to be inserted, and TX

power switch needs to be

turned off.

Press to select Transmit (TX)

or Receive (RX ) modes.

Transmit Mode

Trim Step

Modulation Select

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 137

138 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

1. Both transmitters: With the main power switch off,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

while turning the power switch on to enter the

System mode. The word “TXDSC” will be displayed

and flashing.

2. Press the Channel key to select Transmit (TXDSC) or

Receive (RXDSC) modes.

3. Insert the trainer cord into each transmitter, the

letters DSC will be removed from the screen.

4. Turn off the power switch on each transmitter. The

screen will then change to read either “TXOUT” or

“RXSEL”, depending if transmit or receive modes

were selected.

Transfer Procedure

Transmitting Condition (0% not

sent, 100% transfer complete)

Press Clear to begin transmit

or receive procedure.

Note: It is also possible to access the Data

Transfer function as follows:

1. With the main TX power switch off, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously while inserting the

trainer cord into the DSC jack of both transmitters.

(The transmitters will now be in System mode

automatically)

2. Press the Channel key to select transmit (TX) or

receive (RX) modes.

3. Both transmitters: In the System mode, press the

Up or Down keys until the words “TXOUT” appears on

the screen. This is the Data Transfer program.

4. Receiving Mode Transmitter (TX to receive

programming): Press the Channel key until the screen

reads “RXSEL.” The word “MODEL” will begin

flashing at the top right portion of the LCD directly

over the current model number selected.

5. Select the receiving model number by pressing the

(+) and (-) keys.

Model number and program

to be transmitted (sent)

Trim Step

Modulation Select

Press Channel to select

Transmit (TX) or Receive

(RX) modes.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 138

139

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

CLR

Receiving Condition (0% not

started, 100% completed)

Press the (+) or (-) keys to select model number to

receive program (1-8) from sending transmitter

Receiving Condition (0% not

started, 100% completed)

Transmitting Data

7. Press the Clear key to activate the receiving stand-

by mode. The word “RX IN” will now be indicated on

the screen. The receiving transmitter must be in this

stand by mode before the sending transmitter’s Clear

key is pressed, or the date will not be transferred

successfully.

Press the Clear key to activate

the receiving Standby mode.

The letters “RX IN” will now be

indicated on the screen.

“MODEL” flashing indicates current

receiving model number can be selected

using the (+) or (-) keys “MODEL” flashing

indicates current receiving model number

can be selected using the (+) or (-) keys.

Trim Step

Modulation Select

Press Channel to select

Transmit or Receive modes

Press the Clear key to put the receiving

transmitter into Standby mode. The

screen will display “RX IN”.

Trim Step

Modulation Select

Press to select Transmit (TX)

or Receive (RX) modes

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 139

140 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

8. Transmitting mode transmitter (TX with program

to be sent): Press the Clear key to start transmitting

data. If the data transfer was successful, both

transmitters will indicate the value 100% on the

display when the transmitting is complete.

If there is a data receiving error during transmitting,

the counter will stop. At this time, press the Clear key

to stop the receiving function. If there is any failure

of transferring, the display will appear as follows:

When the receiving counter is stopped or you see

“ERROR” indicated, check the trainer cord

connection and condition and try again. Be sure that

the receiving Mode transmitter is in standby

condition first. Then on the transmitting transmitter

press the Clear key to start transmitting.

Note: The Data Transfer function will not work

when the battery alarm is flashing.

The Trim Step function allows the user to increase or

decrease the coarseness of the servo movement as

compared to the steps or beeps of the digital trim.

The total servo trim movement remains the same,

(approx. 30degree) regardless of the trim step rate

selected(1~10). The factory default setting for the

trim step function is 4, which means that for each

step (beep) of the digital trim, the servo will move in

digital increments of 4. In other words, if a finer trip

step value of 1 is selected, the servo will move in a

digital increment of 1for each step (beep) of the

digital trim. If a more coarse trim value of 10 is

selected, the servo will more in a digital increment of

10 for each step (beep) of the digital trim lever.

TRIM STEP

5.10

Press Clear to reset to the

factory default 4 position.

Throttle Cut

Data Transfer

Press Channel to select

channel to be adjusted

(Throttle, Aileron, Elevator,

Flap Trim, Lever, Flap Trim

Lever).

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase or decrease

the trim step rate.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 140

141

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

The V-Tail/Dual-Flap Wing Mixing function found in

the X-378 allows the user to set the aircraft type as a V-tail and/or dual-flap wing type.

V-TAIL/DUAL-FLAP WING MIXING

5.11

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

Connect right ruddervator to

rudder channel of receiver.

V-Tail Mixing

Connect the left ruddervator to the elevator channel

of the receiver and the right ruddervator to the

rudder channel of the receiver. When the V-Tail Mix is

active, the two surfaces will work together to operate

as both elevators and rudders. In the V-tail system,

each servo’s travel is automatically reduced to 75% of

the normal travel. Dual rate and exponential

functions still operate normally. If the direction of

the travel is incorrect, the individual servos can be

reversed in the Servo Reversing function. The Sub-

Trim function can also be used to trim each surface

individually.

Condition of function

(Off or On)

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (Off).

Function to be adjusted

Flap Lever Function

Trim Step

Press the Channel key

to select the V-Tail or

Dual-Flap functions.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to turn the

functions On and Off.

Connect left ruddervator to

elevator channel of receiver.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 141

142 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

Dual-Flap Mixing

Connect the left flap servo to the Aux 1 channel of the

receiver and connect the right flap to the Aux 2

channel of the receiver. Check the direction that the

flaps operate. The direction of the flaps should match

the ailerons once the Aileron-to-Flap Mix has been

established in the function mode.

Note: The Aileron-to-Flap Mix will only appear

in the Function mode after the Dual-Flap Mix

has been activated as described below. Use

the Aux 2 and flap levers to adjust the trim of

the flaps as needed. The Aux 2 and flap levers

adjust the position of the two-flap servo in

different ways, as determined by the servo

direction for each servo.

Example: If the Aux 1 and Aux 2 servos are

both in the NORM direction, the Aux 2 lever

will move the servos in the same direction,

while the flap lever will move the servos in

opposite directions. If either of the Aux 1 or 2

channels is reversed, the Aux 2 Lever will now

move the servos in opposite directions, while

the flap lever will now move the servos in the

same direction.

Note: If the 3-position flap switch is selected

to operate the flap function (See section 5.12

Flap Switch Selection), the Aux 2 lever will

become inhibited, and the flap lever will

function as the flap trim Lever.

The Travel Adjust and Servo Reversing functions can

be used to fine tune the flap operation as needed. If

necessary, Sub-Trim can be used individually to adjust

each flap.

This system requires four servos in the wing: one for

each aileron and one for each flap.

Channel 2 (Aileron)

(Aileron 1)

Accessing the V-Tail/Dual Flap Function

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, move the

power switch to the On position to access the System

mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “V.TAIL” appears

at the top of the LCD.

3. To activate the V-Tail Mix function, press either the

(+) or (-) keys.

4. To access the Dual-Flap function, press the Channel

key. Next, press the (+) or (-) keys to activate the Dual-

Flap Mix.

4. Press the Clear key to reset either the V-Tail or Dual-

Flap function to the factory default position (Off).

5. To access the Trim Step function, press the Down key.

6. To access the Flap Lever function, press the Up key.

7. To exit the V-Tail/Dual-Flap function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Channel 5 (Gear)

(Aileron 2)

Channel 6 (Aux1) (Flap) Channel 7 (Aux 2) (Aux 2)

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 142

143

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 5:INPUT MODE AND FUNCTION • Sailplane

The Flap Switch Select function allows the flap

channel input to be operated by either the flap lever

(proportional) or the Flap Mix switch (3-Position).

The flap lever can also be used as a trim lever for the

flaps when the Flap Mix switch is selected. When the

flap lever is selected, the function is 100%

proportional from this lever. Selecting the flap lever

and Landing switch (Flap Lever) (FL(+)LS) allows for

the flaps to operate in a three-position manner via

the Flap Mix switch, with the Flap Lever acting as a

trim lever for the flaps.

Note: If the Flap switch is selected (FL+LS)

as the main flap channel input, then the Flap

Lever will operate as a flap trim. This is the

most common Flap switch assignment.

FLAP SWITCH SELECT FUNCTION

5.12

Accessing the Flap Switch Select Function

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys, switch the

transmitter to the On position to enter the

System mode.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP” appears

at the upper right portion of the LCD with the letters

“LEVRS” in the center of the LCD.

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to assign the desired

switch method (LEVRS or FL+LS)

4. To access the V-Tail/Wing Mixing function, press

the Down key.

5. To access the Model Select function, press the

Up key.

6. To exit the Flap/Spoiler Select function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Switch Method Selected

(LEVRS or FL+LS)

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (LEVRS).

Model Select

V-Tail/Dual-Flap Mixing

Press the (+) or (-) key to select

the desired switch to be assigned

(Flap Switch or Flap Lever).

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 143

144 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Accessing the Function Mode

To enter the Function mode, switch the transmitter

power switch to the On position. Press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously, and the display will

show the last active program. Pressing either the

Up or Down key then scrolls through the functions

one by one, according to the Function Mode

Flowchart shown below. Once the appropriate

function is displayed, changes can be made by

pressing the (+) or (-) keys. To select another channel

of a particular function, press the Channel key. If you

transfer to a different function that is channel

selectable, the display will show the same channel.

For example, if you are adjusting the dual rate of the

elevator and you change to the Exponential function,

the channel remains elevator. The Function mode is

the most often used system to input data.

Function Mode Flowchart

Information pertaining to each function is explained

on the page listed next to the function name.

Functions will appear in the same order they are

shown on this chart.

1. Move the power switch to the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Use either the Up or Down to scroll through the

menu and access the applicable function.

FUNCTION MODE

6.1

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Servo reversing

pg. 145

Dual Rate

pg. 146

Exponential

pg. 148

Sub-Trim

pg. 149

Travel Adjust

pg. 150

Elevator to-Flap-

Mixing pg. 151

Aileron-to-Flap Mixing

(only if Dual-Flap setting

is active) pg. 153

Differential Aileron

Mixing pg. 155

Flap-to-Elevator

Mixing pg. 156

Flap-to-Aileron

Mixing pg. 159

Aileron-to-Rudder

Mixing pg. 162

Crow/Camber

Mixing pg. 164

Dual-Flap Trim

pg. 166

Programmable Mixing

1-6 pg. 167

Fail-Safe (only visible

when PCM Modulation

is selected) pg. 171

Trainer Function

pg. 175

Timer Function

pg. 177

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:08 PM Page 144

145

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Reverse Switch Function

The Reverse Switch function is an electronic means

of reversing the throw of a given channel (servo). All

seven channels of the X-378 offer reversible servo

direction. This will ease setup during the servo

installation into your aircraft.

1. Place the transmitter switch in the on position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “REV.”

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Using your transmitter’s control sticks, switches

and potentiometers, move the control surfaces of

your aircraft. Note the travel direction of each of the

corresponding control surfaces.

5. After you have determined which channel(s) need

to have the throw directions reversed, use the

Channel key to call up the appropriate channel. Press

either the (+) or (-) keys to change the travel

direction of the servo. Pressing the Clear key returns

the travel direction to normal.

7. You can observe the change in the travel direction

by moving the appropriate control at this time.

8. To access the Timer function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Dual Rate function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Reverse Switch function, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

SERVO REVERSING

6.2

Channel to be

adjusted

Press Clear to reset

to the factory

normal direction.

Dual-Rate Function

Timer Function

Press Channel to change to the

desired channel to be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to change the

servo direction.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 145

146 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Accessing the Dual-Rate Function

Dual Rates are available for the aileron, elevator and

rudder channels of your R/C aircraft. There is also an

automatic dual rate setting to link your aileron,

elevator, and rudder dual rates to the flight model

switch. This Automatic Dual-Rate function is discussed

in a separate section that follows. Dual-Rates may be

defined as the ability to vary the travel or throw rate of

a servo from a switch. Due to the differing travel rates,

you will find that the sensitivity of the control either

increases or decreases accordingly. A higher rate, or

travel, yields a higher overall sensitivity. You may find

it easier to think of the Dual-Rate function as double-

rates or half-rates.The Dual-Rate function works in

conjunction with the Exponential function to allow

you to precisely tailor your control throws. You may

want to consult the section defining exponential for

further information.

The amount of travel is adjustable from 0-125% in 1%

increments. The factory setting, or default value, for

both the 0 and 1 switch positions is 100%. Either

switch position may be selected as the low or high rate

by placing the switch in the desired position and

adjusting the value accordingly.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

on position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “D/R” appears

in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

(aileron, elevator, rudder or automatic Dual-Rates)

appears.

5. Select the switch position for which you want to

adjust the rate. The number to the upper right of the

current rate value on the display indicates the

current position of the dual rate switch for the

channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or a 1 will

be shown, corresponding to the position of the

switch. To select the opposite switch position, move

the appropriate dual rate switch to the opposite

position. The number that appears above the current

rate value reflects the change.

6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch

position that you have just selected. To decrease the

throw rate, press the (-) key. To increase the throw

rate, press the (+) key. The adjustable rate is from 0-

125% for each switch position and channel.

DUAL RATES

6.3

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

D/R switch

position (0 or 1)

Press Clear to reset

to factory default

settings (100%).

Channel to be adjusted

Exponential

Servo Reversing

Press Channel to select

Aileron, Elevator, Rudder, or

Auto D/R to be adjusted.

Press (+) or (-) to increase

or decrease D/R values.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 146

147

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Dual-Rate Function (continued)

Note: You can observe the servo changes by

moving the respective stick while increasing

or decreasing the values. The control changes

accordingly. To clear the Dual-Rate for the

respective channel and switch position, press

the Clear key. After the dual rates have been

dialed in to your satisfaction, we suggest

that you begin to adjust the exponential

values. Refer to the Exponential section for

more information.

7. To access the Servo Reversing function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Exponential function, press the

Up key.

9. To exit the Dual-Rate function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 147

148 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Accessing the Exponential Function

Programmable exponential adjustments are offered

on the aileron, elevator, and rudder channels of your

R/C aircraft. Exponential is a function that allows you

to tailor the response rate of the stick controls. The

purpose of exponential is to reduce the sensitivity in

the middle portion of stick movement, while still

allowing full travel at the end of the stick movement.

In other words, the end result (travel) remains the

same, although exponential changes the rate at

which it achieves this travel.

The adjustable range of the Exponential Function is

from 0-100%. Zero percent (0%) is linear stick control

which means that the response rate is equal

throughout the stick control. 100% is full

exponential. The larger the exponential value, the

less servo action or sensitivity you will notice around

the neutral setting.

Note: The Exponential function operates in

conjunction with the Dual-Rate function. It is

imperative to understand the Dual-Rate

function prior to adjusting the exponential

values. Exponential may be selected for either

the high or low rate or both.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

access the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “EXP” (Expo-

nential) appears in the upper left corner of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

(aileron, elevator or rudder) appears.

5. Select the switch position for which you want to

adjust the exponential rate. The number directly

above the exponential value on the display indicates

the current position of the dual rate switch for the

channel that you have selected. Either a 0 or 1 will be

shown, corresponding to the position of the switch.

To select the opposite switch position, move the

appropriate Dual-Rate or Flight mode switch to the

opposite position. The number that appears directly

above the Exponential value will reflect the change.

6. Adjust the rate for the channel and the switch

position that you have just selected. To increase the

exponential rate, press the (+) key. As stated

previously, the adjustable rate is from linear (0%)

to100% for each switch position and channel.

Note: Exponential is an acquired feel. As

such, it may take several test flights to

achieve the proper amount of exponential

that fits your flying style.

8. To access the Dual-Rate function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Up key.

10. To exit the Exponential Function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

EXPONENTIAL6.4

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Press Clear to reset

values to the factory

default position.

Dual-Rate switch

position to be

adjusted

Channel to

be adjusted

Sub-Trim Function

Dual-Rate Function

Press to select Aileron, Elevator, or

Rudder position to be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

increase or decrease the

exponential values.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 148

149

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

The Sub-Trim Adjustment function allows you to

electronically fine-tune the centering of your servos.

Individually adjustable for all seven channels with a

range of ±125% (+/-30 degrees servo travel), the sub-

trims can be set for the same neutral settings for

each model stored in the transmitter’s memory. The

Sub-Trim functions provides precise servo arm

neutral positioning if rotating the servo arm will not

allow the desired servo arm position.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. To Access the Function mode, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SUBTRIM”

appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired

channel appears.

5. Press the (+) or (-) key to establish the desired

amount and direction of Sub-Trim.

Note: A (+) or (-) symbol appears to the left of

the sub-trim value to indicate the direction of

sub-trim input.

Caution: Do not use excessive Sub-Trim

adjustments since it is possible to overrun

your servo’s maximum travel if it is off-center.

Remember that it is a trim convenience

function. It is not intended to take the place

of the proper mechanical trim adjustments

that are necessary on any R/C model. An

offset servo will also produce a differential effect.

6. To access the Exponential function, press the

Down key.

7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the Up key.

8. To exit the Sub-Trim function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

Accessing Sub-Trim Adjustment Function

SUB-TRIM6.5

Press Clear to reset

to the factory default

settings (0%).

Sub-Trim Value

Channel to be adjusted

Travel Adjust

Exponential

Press to select

desired channel to

be adjusted (1-7).

Trim value

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 149

150 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

The purpose of travel adjust, also known as endpoint

adjustment or adjustable travel volume, is to offer

you precise servo control deflection in either

direction of servo operation. The X-378 offers travel

adjust for all seven channels. The travel adjust range

is from 0-150% (0 degrees to 60 degrees) from

neutral, or center, and it can be adjusted for each

direction individually. The factory default (data reset)

value is 100% for each direction of servo travel.

TRAVEL ADJUST

6.6

Accessing the Travel Adjust Function

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRAVL”

appears in the upper middle portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key until the desired channel

appears.

5. Move the appropriate control stick (lever, switch, etc)

to the right or left of center to the direction of travel

you want to adjust. An arrow to the right of the travel

adjust value will reflect the current position to be

adjusted. Using our example above, if the aileron stick

is moved to the left, a left-facing arrow will appear to

the left of the travel adjust value on the LCD screen.

6. After the control stick or switch is placed in the

direction of travel to be adjusted, press the (+) or (-)

key until the proper amount of servo travel is shown

on the lower right side of the LCD. Press the (+) key

to increase the amount of servo travel. Press the (-)

key to decrease the amount of servo travel.

7. Follow the same procedure for the remaining

channels.

8. To access the Sub-Trim function, press the Down key.

9. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,

press the Up key.

10. To exit the Travel Adjust function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

CLR

Press Clear to reset

to factory default

settings (100 %).

Travel direction to be adjusted

(left/Right, Up/Down, etc)

Channel to be

adjusted

Elevator-to-Flap

Mixing Sub-Trim

Press Channel to select the

desired channel to be adjusted.

Sub-Trim values

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 150

151

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

When the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is active

and a value of flaps is input, the flaps will be

deflected each time the elevator stick is used. The

actual flap movement is adjustable for both up and

down elevator. The most frequently used application

is up elevator/down flaps. When used in this manner,

the aircraft pitches up much more quickly than

normal and is helpful in tight thermal turns.

Note:Only the elevator input indicated by the

LCD will be cleared. For example, if the Up

arrow were displayed and Clear were pushed,

the Down arrow value would still be retained

by the transmitter. In order to change

elevator operating direction, move the

elevator control stick in the direction you

want to mix with flaps. Using our example,

we would input down elevator. The down

arrow would be displayed at the lower left

portion of the LCD. Our mixing value would

also change to reflect our input.

If the Flap-Mixing switch selected is not in the on

position, the position indicator on the LCD will

change from “ON” to “OFF.” This indicates that the

Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is not currently

active. Although the current mixing value will still be

displayed, it will not be possible to alter this value

until the selected mix switch is returned to the On

position. Refer to the Elevator-to-Flap Switch

Activation section for more information.

ELEVATOR-TO-FLAP MIXING

6.7

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (0%).

Up/Down arrows change

when the elevator stick

is moved, and position

to be adjusted.

Mixing Value

Mix Switch Position

(up=ON, center or low

position displays OFF).

Aileron-to-Flap Mixing

Travel Adjust

Press the Channel key to access

the switch selection function.

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase or decrease

the mixing value for

each position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 151

152 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “ELEV-FLAP”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

Note: If the selected Flap-Mixing Switch is

not in the uppermost position, the position

indicator will read “OFF.” The selected Flap-

Mixing switch must be in the on position in

order to make adjustments to the flap-

mixing value.

4. Move the elevator stick in the direction you want

to mix with flaps.

Note: The position indicator will reflect this

change by replacing the up arrow with a

down arrow or vice-versa. A Down arrow

indicates up elevator, and an Up arrow

indicates down elevator (The arrow position

indicates stick position, not elevator direction.)

5. Press the (+) or (-) key to increase or decrease the

amount of flaps to be mixed. If you want to reverse

the flap travel, press the Clear key, bringing the

mixing value to the factory default (0%), and increase

the value using the opposite key (+) or (-) from the

key originally selected.

6. Once you have adjusted the first mixing position

(Up or Down), place the elevator stick in the

opposite direction and follow Step 5 above to adjust

the second elevator mixing value.

7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Up key.

9. To exit the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Elevator-to-Flap Mixing Switch Selection

The X-378 allows for the use of either of two switches

(three switch positions) for the activation of the

Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function. You can also

enable the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function so that it

remains active at all times. The Elevator-to-Flap

Mixing function is generally used for multi-task

duration, speed, distance, and slope aerobatics. You

may want to use different mix values for up and

down elevator positions.

Accessing the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing Function

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

LCD Display Description

ON The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function will remain on at all times.

MIX The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is activated/inhibited by

the Rudder D/R/Mix switch located on the upper rear of the Tx.

FLP-D The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is only activated when the

flap switch is in the lower (launch) position.

FLP-U The Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function is only activated when the

flap switch is in the upper (reflex) position.

Accessing the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing Switch Selection

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “ELEV-FLAP”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch

Selection function.

5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the desired

switch to assign the mix to.

6. Press the Channel key again to return to the

Elevator-to-Flap function.

7. To access the Travel Adjust function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function,

press the Up key.

9. To exit the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 152

153

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

1. While pressing the Down and Channel keys move

the power switch to the On position.

2. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-FLAP”

is displayed in the center portion of the LCD.

3. Press either the (+) or (-) key to change the value

of the mix. A (+) or (-) sign will appear to the left of

the current value. This indicates the direction of

travel. If the travel is in the wrong direction, increase

the value in the opposite direction. Normal

application is that the flaps travel the same direction

as the ailerons.

4. After the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing values have been

adjusted, you can select the desired mixing switch to

activate the Aileron-to-Flap Mix. You can also choose

to leave the Mixing function on at all times (factory

default).

AILERON-TO-FLAP MIXING (Dual-Flap Activated in System Mode)

6.8

The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is only

applicable when the Dual-Flap Trim function is

activated in the System mode. For information on

how to activate the Dual-Flap Trim function, refer to

the V-Tail/Dual-Flap function. The purpose of this

mixing function is to mix the ailerons with the flaps

so that the flaps will operate in conjunction with the

ailerons. In effect, this will increase the amount of

aileron control surface area available. The amount of

mix is adjustable; thus, you can tailor the aileron

response to fit your flying style. The flap lever on the

front right face of the X-378 transmitter will trim the

flap channel (Aux1) as ailerons. The digital aileron

trim lever will trim the ailerons (aileron channel). The

digital aileron trim has no effect on the flaps.

Note: If differential mixing is being used, the

flaps will also operate differentially according

to the value input in the differential mixing.

This mixing will also include the aileron

operating value when programmable mixing

1 or 2 is used with the ailerons. If the Aileron-

to-Flap Mixing activation switch is in the Off

position, the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing would

be inhibited. Off would replace the On switch

indication in our example.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (0%).

Mixing Value

Switch Position

Aileron

Differential

Elevator-to-Flap

Press the Channel key to

access the switch

selection function.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

increase or decrease the

mixing value for each position.

Accessing the Aileron to Flap Mixing Function

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 153

154 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

The purpose of the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing Activation

Selection is to enable you to select a switch and/or

switch position that will activate the Aileron-to-Flap

Mixing function. You can also choose to leave the

Aileron-to-Flap Mix active at all times.

Aileron-to-Flap Mixing Activation Selection

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2.Access the Function mode by press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-FLAP”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch

Selection function.

5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the desired

switch to assign the mix to.

6. Press the Channel key again to return to the

Aileron-to-Flap function.

7. To access the Elevator-to-Flap function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Aileron Differential function, press

the Up key.

9. To exit the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Acessing the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing Switch Selection

LCD Display Description

The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function will remain on at all times.

MIX

The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder D/R/Mix

switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.

FLP-D

The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch

is in the lower (launch) position.

F-U/D

The Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the

upper and lower (reflex) positions. The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is

in the center position. This mix is often used with Launch mode (preset) also for

aerobatics, speed and distance tasks.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 154

155

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

DIFFERENTIAL AILERON MIXING

6.9

The X-378 transmitter offers aileron differential.

Differential ailerons are used to tailor the flight

control system to a particular aircraft. Because the

downward travel of the aileron creates more drag

than does the upward travel, it is necessary to reduce

the amount of down travel for each aileron

electronically. This drag may very well produce a

yawing tendency in your aircraft. As yaw is

undesirable in most R/C aircraft, it is best to correct

for this common flight tendency. Aileron differential

overcomes the yaw as it reduces the downward travel

of the ailerons.

Note: When the Dual-Flap Trim function is

active, the differential value will also apply to

the flapperons. Differential may also be

obtained by using the Travel Adjust function.

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “DIFF.”

appears in the upper left corner of the LCD. Press the

(+) or (-) key until the desired amount of differential

is established. The operating range for differential is

0% (NORM) to 100% (SPLIT). The following diagrams

may ease the understanding of the Differential

Aileron Mixing function:

If left at 0%, the ailerons maintain equal travel for

both sides. That is, there will not be any differential

whatsoever. If set at 50%, the aileron that is lowered

travels 50% or half, as far as the upward aileron. If

adjusted to 100%, you achieve what is commonly

referred to as a “split.” This means that the only

aileron that moves is the aileron that travels upward.

The aileron that normally drops remains stationary.

4. To access the Aileron-to-Flap Mixing function,

press the Down key.

5. To access the Flap-to-Elevator function, press the

Up key.

6. To exit the Aileron Differential Mixing function,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (0%).

Differential Value

Flap-to-Elevator

Mixing Aileron-to-Flap

Mixing

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase the value

(range 0-100%).

Accessing the Differential Aileron Mixing Function

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 155

156 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

FLAP TO ELEVATOR MIXING

6.10

When the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is active

and a value for elevator is input, the elevator will be

deflected accordingly each time the flaps are used.

The actual elevator movement is adjustable for both

up and down flaps. Thus, the elevator is used to

eliminate the pitch up or pitch down tendency when

the flaps are raised or lowered. This function also

includes a mixing offset to redefine the neutral

position of the elevator channel. The effect of the

offset is to change the point at which the mixing

actually begins.

Note: To change the flap operating direction

to be adjusted (up or down), move the

selected flap activation switch to the second

activation position. The arrow on the LCD

will change from an up to a down arrow or

vise versa to indicate the current flap

position to be adjusted.

The X-378 allows for the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing

to be left on at all times or turned on and off by a

switch position. For information, refer to the Flap-

to-Elevator Mixing Activation Selection section.

If the elevator mixing activation switch is in the Off

position, the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function would

be inhibited. Off would replace the percentage (0%)

in our example. This mix generally will be used as

the launch preset trim for the elevator. You can also

adjust preset trim for reflex.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position (0%).

Flap direction to be adjusted

Mixing Value

Activation switch position (On or Off)

Flap-to-Aileron Mix

Aileron Differential

Press the Channel

key to access the

switch selection

function.

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to increase or decrease

the mixing value for

each position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 156

157

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously while the power

switch is in the On position.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “FLAP-

ELEV” appears in the center portion of your LCD.

Note: If “OFF” appears in the lower left

portion of the LCD, move the flap switch to

the opposite position from the one it

currently occupies. If “OFF” is still on the

LCD, move the mixing switch.

4. Move the Flap Mix switch until the desired flap

position to be adjusted is displayed on the LCD (up

or down arrow)

Note: As the flap switch is moved, the Up

and Down Arrows at the lower left of the LCD

will change to the appropriate flap operating

direction.

5. Press either the (+) or (-) key to increase or

decrease the amount of elevator input. If the elevator

is moving in the wrong direction, i.e., opposite of the

direction you want to mix with the flaps, Change the

current mixing value from (+) to (-) or vise versa to

change the mixing direction.

Flap-to-Elevator Mixing Activation Selection

The purpose of the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing

Activation Selection function is to enable you to

select a switch and/or switch position that will

activate the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function. You

can also choose to leave the Flap-to-Elevator Mix

active at all times.

Accessing the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing Function

Accessing the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing Switch Selection

LCD Display Description

ON The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function will remain on at all times.

MIX

The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder D/R/Mix

switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.

FLP-D

The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch

is in the lower (launch) position.

F-U/D

The Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the

upper and lower (reflex) positions. The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is

in the center position.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP-ELEV”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch

Selection function.

5. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the desired

switch to assign the mix to.

6. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flap-

to-Elevator function.

7. To access the Aileron Differential function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Flap-to-Aileron function, press the

Up key.

9. To exit the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 157

158 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Activation Switch Offset

The offset feature redefines the neutral position of

the selected mix activation switch. The effect of this

is to change the point where mixing actually begins

to take place relative to the switch position selected.

1. Press the Channel key until “OFFSET” appears in

the center of the LCD.

2. Move the assigned mix switch to the position that

you want to establish as the starting point for the mix.

3. Press the Clear key to store the offset value. The

offset value will generally be + or - 171, depending

on the mix switch position.

4. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flap-

to-Elevator function.

5. To access the Aileron Differential function, press

the Down key.

6. To access the Flap-to-Aileron function, press the

Up key.

7. To exit the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 158

159

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

FLAP-TO-AILERON MIXING

6.11

The purpose of the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is

to allow you to couple the ailerons to the flaps. This

will enable you to droop the ailerons with the flaps

to increase lift. If you should find it necessary to

redefine the neutral position of the ailerons relative

to the mix switch position,

a mixing offset is also provided.

Note: The offset value for the Flap-to-Aileron

Mixing function will initially be the same as

the point established for the Flap-to-Elevator

mix, if utilized. The offset position for the

Flap-to-Aileron Mix can also be altered

as needed.

In order to use the Flap-to-Aileron function, it will be

necessary to employ one servo per aileron and at

least one on the flaps.

This mixing system will include the flap operating

value when programmable mixing 1 or 2 is applied to

the flaps.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the factory

default position.

Current Mixing Value

Aileron-to-Rudder Mix

Flap-to-Elevator Mix

Press to

access the

Switch

Selection

function.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to set the

mixing value, or to

select the switch

activation.

LCD Display Description

ON The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function will remain on at all times.

MIX

The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder D/R/Mix

switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.

FLP-D

The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch

is in the lower (launch) position.

F-U/D

The Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the

upper and lower (reflex) positions. The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is

in the center position.

Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Activation Selection

The purpose of the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Activation

Selection function is to enable you to select a switch

and/or switch position that will activate the Flap-to-

Aileron Mixing function. You can also choose to

leave the Flap-to-Aileron active at all times.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 159

160 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Switch Function

Adjusting the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing Function

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP-AILE”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

4. Press the Channel key once to access the Switch

Selection function.

5. Press the (+) or (- ) keys to select the desired

switch to assign the mix to.

6. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flap-

to-Aileron function.

7. To access the Flap-to-Elevator function, press the

Down key.

8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mix function,

press the Up key.

9. To exit the Flap-to-Elevator Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

Note: If the Aileron Mixing activation switch

is in the Off position, the Flap-to-Aileron

mixing would be inhibited.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously while the power

switch is in the On position.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “FLAP-AILE”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

Note: If “OFF” appears in the lower left

portion of the LCD, move the flap switch to

the opposite position from the one it

currently occupies. If “OFF” is not replaced

with “ON,” repeat this procedure with the

mixing switch.

4. Press either the (+) or (-) key to increase the

amount of aileron to be mixed with flaps. Moving the

flap switch (located on the front left face of the

transmitter) will now move both the ailerons and

the flaps.

5. After the mixing percentage is input, select the

switch and/or position for which you want to activate

the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function. You can also

choose to leave the Mixing function enabled (ON) at

all times. To select the mixing activator, press the

Channel key. Your display will appear as follows:

6. Press either the (+) or (-) key to select among the

mixing activators. For more information on the

mixing activators refer to the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing

Activation Selection section.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 160

161

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Activation Switch Offset

The offset feature redefines the neutral position of

the selected mix activation switch. The effect of this

is to change the point where mixing actually begins

to take place relative to the switch position selected.

1. Press the Channel key until “OFFSET” appears in

the center of the LCD.

2. Move the assigned mix switch to the position

that you want to establish as the starting point for

the mix.

3.Press the Clear key to store the offset value. The

offset value will generally be + or - 171, depending

on the mix switch position.

4. Press the Channel key again to return to the Flap-

to-Aileron function.

5. To access the Aileron to Rudder Mix function,

press the Up key.

6. To access the Flap-to-Elevator function, press the

Down key.

7. To exit the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 161

162 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Function

This form of mixing is designed so that when input

to the aileron stick is given, the rudder servo will also

move, eliminating the need to coordinate these

controls manually. When adjusting, if an opposite

mixing direction of the rudder servo is required,

simply press the (+) or (-) keys to change the mixing

value from a + to - or a - to a +. This will reverse the

mixing direction of the rudder from its original

direction. The switch used to activate this mix can

also be selected as explained below. The factory

default mix switch for the Aileron-to-Rudder Mix

function is Rudder D/R/ Mix switch located at the

upper right side of the transmitter.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode. To do so, press the

Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-RUDD”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

Note: If the current mixing switch is not in

the on position, the position indicator will

read “OFF.” The current mixing switch must

be in the On position in order to make adjust-

ments to the Aileron-to-Rudder mixing value.

4. With the current mix switch On, press the (+) or (-)

key to increase or decrease the amount of rudder to

be mixed with aileron. If you want to reverse the

rudder mix direction, press the Clear key, bringing the

mixing value to the factory default (0%) and increase

the value using the opposite key (+) or -) from the

key originally selected.

5. To access the Elevator-to-Flap Mixing function,

press the Down key.

6. To access the Landing Mode function, press the

Up key.

7. To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously..

AILERON-TO-RUDDER MIXING

6.12

Mix/Switch Position Mixing Value

Crow/Camber Mixing

Flap-to-Aileron Mixing

Press Channel to

access the mixing

switch assignment

function.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to adjust the

mixing value, or to

select the mix

switch assignment.

Press the Clear

key to reset to the

factory default

position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 162

163

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Assigning the Mixing Activation Switch

Assigning the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing Switch Function

The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing program can be

turned on and off using several different assignable

switch options.

The mix is off or inhibited when the switch is in the

center position.

This mix is often used with launch mode (preset)

also for aerobatics, speed and distance tasks.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “AILE-RUDD”

appears in the center portion of your LCD.

4. Press the Channel key to access the switch

assignment function.

5.Press the (+) or (-) key to select the desired

switch/function to activate the Aileron-to-Rudder

Mixing function.

6.To access the Flap-to-Aileron Mixing function,

press the Down key.

7.To access the Crow/Camber Mixing function, press

the Up key.

8.To exit the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

LCD Display Description

ON The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function will remain on at all times.

MIX

The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function is activated/inhibited by the Rudder

D/R/Mix switch located on the upper rear of the transmitter.

FLP-D

The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function is only activated when the flap switch

is in the lower (launch) position.

F-U/D

The Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function is activated when the flap switch is in the

upper and lower (reflex) positions.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 163

164 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

The purpose of this function is to allow the ailerons

to be used as spoilers in conjunction with the

normal spoilers and flaps. You can also choose to

include a preset amount of up or down elevator to

avoid pitching up or down when the crow/camber

system is active. This system is activated using the

gear switch on the top left corner of the transmitter

and increasing the spoiler (throttle) stick. This will

deploy the crow/camber system as speed brakes.

Two different setups are available for the

crow/camber mixing function, one for each position

of the crow on and off switch. A mixing offset is also

available to redefine the neutral position of the

spoiler system.

Crow/Camber Mixing

6.13

Channel to be

adjusted

Mix Value

GEAR switch position (0 or 1)

Dual-Flap Trim

Aileron-to-Rudder Mix

Press to select the desired

channel or offset to be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-)

keys to set the desired

mixing value.

Press the Clear key to

reset the mix value or

to set the spoiler

offset position.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 164

165

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Crow/Camber Mixing Function

1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “SPOI”

appears in the center left portion of the LCD.

4. Place the crow/camber switch (GEAR) in the

position you want to be the On position (0 or 1).

5. Press the Channel key until the channel on which

you want to set the value appears to the right of “SPOI.”

Note: The switch position appears just to the

right of this display. Press either the (+) or (-)

key to increase or decrease the individual

mix values for each of these channels. Press

the Channel key again until all channel values

are input. Normal operation is ailerons up,

flaps down.

Setting the Spoiler Offset Position

If you want to use the spoiler offset:

6. Press the Channel key until “OFFSET” appears in

the center portion of the LCD.

7. Move the spoiler (throttle) stick to the desired

offset position (usually full low stick) and press the

Clear key. The offset is now saved. The normal

position is spoiler (throttle) stick low.

8. To access the Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing function,

press the Down key.

9. To access the Dual-Flap Trim function, press the

Up key.

10. To exit the Crow/Camber Mixing function, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 165

166 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Dual-Flap Trim Function

The purpose of the Dual-Flap Trim function is to

allow the trimming of the two flap channels (Aux 1

and Aux 2). Two separate trim Levers are accessible

in the Dual-Flap Trim function. The Aux 2 Lever,

located on the front Left face of the transmitter,

adjusts both flap control surfaces up/down in unison

(L6 on the LCD). The Flap Lever, located on the front

right face of the transmitter, trims the flaps in

opposite directions as ailerons (L5 on the LCD).

Note: The Dual-Flap Trim function must be

active. Also, the aileron ratchet trim has no

effect on the flaps.

In order for “L5” to appear on the LCD, the Flap Trim

activation must be selected to FL+LS in the System

mode in addition to the Dual-Flap Mixing function.

Refer to the Flap Channel Input Selection and Wing

Mixing sections respectively (System mode) for more

information.

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Access the Function mode by pressing the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously while the power

switch is On.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TRIM”

appears in the center portion of the LCD below the

Dual-Flap Trim icon.

4. Press the (+) or (-) key to activate the L6 trim. The

display will change to indicate “ON .”

5. If the Dual-Flap Trim function is active and FL+LS

is selected (System mode), press the Channel key

until L5 is displayed.

6. Once L5 is indicated, press either the (+) or (-) key

to activate the trim feature. The display will change to

“ON.” Now the Aux 2 and flap levers may be used to

make in-flight adjustments to these control surfaces.

7. To access the Crow/Camber Mixing function, press

the Down key.

8. To access Programmable Mix #1, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Dual-Flap Trim function, press the Down

and Channel keys simultaneously.

Dual-Flap Trim (when Dual-Flap is selected in the System mode)

6.14

Switch to be adjusted

Programmable Mix #1

Crow/Camber Mix Press Channel to select L5

or L6 switch to be adjusted.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to turn the mix

switches on and off.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 166

167

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

PROGRAMMABLE MIXING 1-6

6.15

The X-378 offers six programmable mixes to be used

for any number of different purposes. This function

allows mixing any one channel to any other channel

to make the aircraft easier to fly. This mix can remain

on at all times, or be switched on and off in flight

using a number of different switches.

Mix numbers 1-4 are of the standard variety, in that

the digital trim for the master channel only affect the

master channel, and not the slave channel. Mix

numbers 5 and 6 are of the “Trim Include” variety.

These mixes are used any time the mix you are

performing requires the Slave channels trim position

to be varied when the master channel’s digital trim

position is varied. An example for this type of mix

would be when dual-elevator or dual-aileron servos

are used, and connected to two separate channels of

the system, rather than using a single channel with a

Y-Harness.

Each channel of this radio is identified by an

abbreviated name. The chart below indicates the

channel and its corresponding abbreviation. The

channel name appearing first is known as the

“master channel” or the channel to which you want

to mix. The second number is known as the “slave

channel” or the channel that is being mixed into the

master channel. For example, “AILE-RUDD” would

indicate Aileron-to-Rudder Mixing. Each time the

aileron stick is moved, the aileron will deflect, and

the rudder will automatically move in the direction

and to the value input. Mixing is proportional, so

small inputs of the master channel will produce

small outputs of the slave channel. Each

programmable mix has a mixing “offset.” The

purpose of the mixing offset is to re-define the

neutral position of the slave channel.

1. THRO Spoiler

2. AILE Left Aileron

3. ELEV Elevator

4. RUDD Rudder

5. AIL Right Aileron

6. FLAP Left Flap

7. AUX 2 Right Flap

1. SP01 Spoiler

2. AILE Left Aileron

3. ELEV Elevator

4. RUDD Rudder

5. GEAR Right Aileron

6. AUX 1 Left Flap

7. AUX 2 Right Flap

Programmable Mix #2

Flap Lever Adjustment

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

select the master channel.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 167

168 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “MIX 1”

appears in the upper right portion of the LCD.

Selecting the Master and Slave Mixing Channels

4. Press the (+) key to activate the mix. Press the (+)

or (-) keys again to select the master channel.

5. Press the Channel key to move the cursor to the

Slave channel position.

6. Press the (+) or (-) keys to select the slave channel.

7. Press the Channel key once. The display will

continue to show the current mixing channels at the

top of the LCD, but will now have a flashing arrow at

the bottom left of the LCD to indicate the current

stick position (master) to be adjusted.

Setting the Mixing Values

8. While holding the master stick in the direction you

want to mix, press the (+) or (-) keys to increase or

decrease the mixing value for the slave channel. The

value at the lower right of the LCD will change to

display the current mix value selected. Next, hold the

master stick to the other side to adjust the mix for the

other direction.

Note: The current mixing switch must be

in the On position for the mixing values to

be adjusted.

Setting the Mixing Switch Activation

9. Press the Channel key once again. The display will

have SW ON indicated at the center portion of the

LCD with the word “ON” located in the upper right of

the LCD. This indicates the current switch assignment

to activate this mix. “ON” indicates that this mix is

currently selected to always be active (ON).

Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function

Master Channel

Slave channel

Stick position to be

adjusted Mixing Value

Programmable Mix #2

Mix Switch Position

Flap Lever Adjustment

Function

Press the Channel key to move through the

mixing functions (master/slave channel, mix

switch activation, offset value).

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

adjust the mixing values

and to select the desired

mix activation switch.

Press the Clear key to

store the offset value

or to reset the mixing

values to the factory

default positions.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 168

169

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Programmable Mixing Function (continued)

Setting Mixing Value

The mix switch options for Mixes #1, 4, and 5 are:

ON Always On

MIX Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch

FLP-D: Activated in the down position of the Flap Mix switch

FLP-U Activated in the up position of the Flap Mix switch

The Mix switch options for Mixes # 2, 3, and 6 are

ON Always On

MIX Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch

BTFYO: Activated in the forward position of the Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)

BTFY1 Activated in the rearward position of the Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)

Setting the Mixing Channel Offset

9. Press the Channel key once again. The display will

show the current mixing channels at the top of the

LCD, with the word “OFFSET” at the center of the

LCD. The value to the lower right is the mixing offset

neutral point, currently 0.

10. Hold the master stick in the position you want to

make the neutral point of the slave channel and push

the Clear key. A new value with a (+) or (-) sign will

appear. This is the new neutral point for the slave

channel (point that the mix is activated). To reset the

value back to 0, move the master stick back to the

center position and press the Clear key to reset.

Note: The master channel trim must be

centered for this to reset to 0 using the

Clear key.

11. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

to exit the Programmable Mix function.

Note: With a little practice, programmable

mixing will become easier compared with the

first time you try it. The best part of a

computer radio is that if you don’t like

something, you can change it. Mixing is only

limited by your imagination.

The X-378 transmitter has six multi-purpose

programmable mixes available. For these mixing

operations, first determine the mix type required

(standard 1-4, or trim include 5-6), master and slave

channels, offset and operating switch settings, if

necessary, and then adjust the mixing value.

For setting mixing value, move and hold the master

channel control (up, down, left or right) and set the

slave servo mix value by pressing either the (+) or (-)

keys. To reverse direction of the slave mix, press the

opposite of the (+) or (-) keys until the value of mix is

set in the reverse direction. If the reference of the

offset point is moved (see section below), the slave

channel’s direction will change from that position.

Setting the Mix Offset Position

Any position of the master channel can be used as a

reference (starting) point for mixing. This is useful for

channels that have no neutral position. With this

function, you can use program mixing with respect to

an arbitrary position of the lever/switch. To set the

offset position, put the master channel at the desired

position and press the Clear key. The position is

stored in the memory and its offset value from the

neutral position is indicated numerically on the

display. Once this offset point has been set, the

mixing value at the offset position is now set to zero.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 169

170 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Functions Related to Program Mixing

The functions related to the operating range of the

master channel are as follows:

Mixing 1 and 2

Selecting FLAP (Aux 1) for the master channel:

When the slave channel is aileron (AILE), its mixing

operation is affected by aileron differential settings.

When the slave channel is flap (FLAP), its mixing

operation is affected by Flap-to-Aileron Mix setting.

When Dual-Flap setting is active and the slave

channel is AUX 2, its mixing operation is affected by

aileron differential settings.

Mixing 3 and 4

When the master channel is throttle (spoiler), its

mixing operation is affected by the spoiler trim settings.

Trim Include Mixes 5 and 6

Programmable Mixes 5 and 6 offer mixing with the

Trim Include function. The Trim Include function is

automatically activated when mixes 5 and 6 are used.

Mixes 5 and 6 with Trim Include

Whenever the master channel is aileron, elevator,

rudder or throttle, you have the option of allowing

the master channel’s trim lever to mix into the slave

channel. As stated previously, the Mixing with Trim

function is always activated in mixes 5 and 6. You

can observe the operation by watching the slave

channel while moving the master channel’s trim lever.

Note: If you have not yet entered values for

the mixing percentages, the slave channel

will remain stationary. Also, if the mixing

percentages are very low, the movement of

the slave channel from the trim lever is also

very small.

Include Mixing

The Include Mixing function allows other

programmed mixing values for the master channel.

As stated previously, the Include Mixing function is

always activated in Mixes 5 and 6.

For example,

Mix 5: AILE - THRO

Mix 6: THRO - RUDD

Mix 6’s operating value also now includes the

operating value from Mix 5’s master channel

(aileron). By moving the aileron control stick, Mix 5

has the ailerons mixing into the throttle, and now

also the rudder from Mix 6. At the same time, Mix 6

is mixing the throttle into the rudder only. Since the

Include Mixing is always active, you are also mixing

your ailerons into the rudder. This results in the

aileron stick moving not only the aileron servo but

also the throttle and rudder servos.

Include Mixing may sound complex, but it

actually eliminates the need for a third mixing

program to mix the aileron and rudder channels.

Therefore, Include Mixing reduces the number of

mixing programs needed when using multiple

mixing functions.

Mixing Operation and Switches

As mentioned previously, each mixing program can

be turned on and off by a lever or switch. The levers

and switches that can be selected for program

mixing are tabulated at the right with their

abbreviations appearing on the display and their

corresponding positions.

The mix switch options for Mixes #1, 4, and 5are:

ON: Always On

MIX: Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix Switch

FLP-D: Activated in the Down position of the Flap

Mix switch

FLP-U: Activated in the Up position of the Flap

Mix switch

The Mix switch options for Mixes # 2, 3, and 6 are:

ON: Always On

MIX: Activated by the RUDD D/R/Mix switch

BTFYO: Activated in the Forward position of the

Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)

BTFY1: Activated in the Rearward position of the

Butterfly Mix switch (GEAR)

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 170

171

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

FAIL-SAFE/HOLD FUNCTION (PCM ONLY)

6.16

The Fail-Safe/Hold function is available only when

you use the X-378 transmitter in either of the PCM

modulations-S-PCM or Z-PCM. This function is

designed to help minimize damage to your aircraft

during a loss of signal to the receiver. The servos

either assume the fail-safe presets or hold their last

good signal position.

Note: In the PCM modulations, the Fail-

Safe/Hold function cannot be totally disabled

so that the servos will react to interference in

the same way as they do in a PPM (FM)

system. This is only possible with the use of a

PPM receiver and the transmitter in the

PPM modulation. Since the actual screen

appearance varies depending on the

modulation of your radio, refer to the

appropriate modulation section that follows.

If you are in the PPM modulation, the Fail-

Safe/Hold function is not applicable.

Therefore, the Fail-Safe/Hold function will not

appear on your LCD screen menu while in the

PPM mode. Refer to the Modulation Selection

section for more information pertaining to the

broadcast signal of your X-378 transmitter.

CLR

Hold (Z-PCM)

The Hold Function is automatically activated when

the radio is turned on and is in the Z-PCM

modulation. This function stops (or holds) the servos

in the positions they were in just prior to the

interference. Therefore, your aircraft maintains the

position held immediately before the interference

was experienced. When a clear signal is restored, the

Hold function releases, and control of the airplane

returns to you.

Accessing the Fail Safe/Hold Function in Z PCM Modulation

Trainer Function

Programmable Mix 6

Press the (+) or (-) keys to select

the desired hold delay time.

Move the control

sticks to the desired

Hold position, then

press Clear to store

these positions.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 171

172 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the PCM Hold Function (Z-PCM)

Setting the Fail-Safe/Hold Memory in Z-PCM Modulation

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

access the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “FAIL-S”

(fail-safe) appears in the upper left portion of the LCD.

Note: If “Fail-Safe” does not appear on your

LCD, it is because you are transmitting in

PPM. Fail-Safe is not applicable in the PPM

mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode

Selection section for more information.You

should never attempt to adjust the Fail-Safe

function when the aircraft is running.

When the Fail-Safe function is activated (i.e., when

the signal is interrupted), the transmitter

automatically moves each servo to a preset position.

The position that each servo assumes is determined

by you, as is the time length of interference that

must occur before servo movement.

After the interference has ceased, control of the

aircraft returns immediately to you. There are three

time delays to choose from: 0.25 second, 0.5 second

and 1.0 second. These time delays are the amount of

time it takes, starting the moment the interference

occurs, until the servos assume their preset

positions.

1. After accessing the Fail-Safe function, it is time to

adjust the Fail-Safe presets.

2. Select among the three time delays (.25, .50 or 1.0

second). Press the (+) or (-) key until the appropriate

delay appears on the screen.

3. Hold the transmitter sticks in the positions that

you want the servos to assume during signal loss

conditions. You can determine fail-safe preset

positions for the other channels by placing the other

channel switches in the positions that you want

them to assume during interference.

4. With the sticks and switches in the desired fail-

safe positions, touch the Clear key. This will enter

these locations as the fail-safe memory settings. A

single high-pitched beep will be heard when the Clear

key is pressed indicating that the positions have

been memorized.

5. To confirm that the input of data was successful,

switch the transmitter off. The controls will move to

the input locations. If not, repeat step 4 again.

Note: These preset positions remain stored

in the transmitter’s memory until both the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium

backup battery have been removed (or until

data reset has been performed). Therefore,

you do not have to reset the fail-safe each

time you fly. Should you want to re-adjust

the fail-safe presets, access the Fail-Safe

function and adjust the presets as you have

just done. The transmitter automatically

recalls the settings for the last Fail-Safe

adjustment.

6. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press

the Down key.

7. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.

8. To exit the fail-safe function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 172

173

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CLR

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Hold (S-PCM) The S-PCM Hold function is

automatically activated when the radio is turned on

and is in the S-PCM modulation. This function stops

(or holds) the servos in the positions they were in just

prior to the interference. Therefore, your aircraft

maintains the position held immediately before the

interference was experienced. When a clear signal is

restored, the Hold function releases, and control of

the aircraft returns to you.

1. Place the transmitter power switch in the

On position.

2. While the power switch is in the On position, press

the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to access

the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until the “FAIL-S”

(fail-safe) appears in the upper left portion of the LCD.

Note: If “Fail-Safe” does not appear on your

LCD, it is because you are transmitting in

PPM. Fail-Safe is not applicable in the PPM

mode. Refer to the Modulation Mode

Selection Section for more information.

Accessing the Fail-Safe/Hold Function in S-PCM Modulation

Fail-Safe channel to be programmed.

Trainer Function

Programmable Mix 6

Press Channel to select the desired

channel to be programmed.

Press the (+) or (-) keys to

select Hold (HO) or Fail-Safe

(F.S.) modes for each channel.

Press the Clear key to store the

fail-safe servo positions for all

channels set to F.S.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 173

174 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Fail Safe/Hold Combination in S-PCM Modulation

Setting the Fail Safe/Hold Memory in S-PCM Modulation

The X-378 allows you to combine the Hold and Fail-

Safe presets for all seven channels on the receiver -

you can select fail-safe or hold independently for all

channels on your aircraft. In other words, some

channels will hold their last clear signal position

(Hold), while others assume the preset position

(Fail-Safe). Once the fail-safe has been activated by

signal interruption (interference), the transmitter

automatically moves the servos to a preset position.

The predetermined servo positions are set by you. In

the S-PCM Fail-Safe, the time delay (the amount of

time it takes, starting the moment the interference

occurs, until the servos assume the preset positions)

is fixed at .25 seconds. After the interference has

ceased, normal operation of the aircraft returns to

you immediately.

1. First, select all of the channels for which you want

to enter a fail-safe preset. To do so, use the Channel

key until the appropriate channel name appears in

the upper right portion of the LCD. We will use the

aileron (AILE) for our example. The display will

appear as shown above.

2. Press either the (+) or (-) key. This will change

the display from Hold (HO) to the Fail-Safe (F.S.)

preset display.

3. Repeat steps #1 and #2 for all channels desired to

be set to the Fail-Safe (F.S.) position.

4. Hold all of the appropriate transmitter control

sticks and switches in the desired positions and

press the Clear key. This will enter the location as the

fail-safe memory setting for all channels selected to

F.S. When the Clear key is pressed, a single high-pitch

beep will be heard indicating that the Fail-Safe

positions have been stored.

5. Hold the aileron stick to the right and press the

Clear key.

6. To confirm that the input of data was successful to

the applicable channels, switch the transmitter off.

All channels selected to Fail-Safe (F.S.) should to

their selected positions.

Note: These preset positions remain stored

in the transmitter’s memory until both the

transmitter battery pack and the lithium

backup battery have been removed (or until

the Data Reset function has been utilized).

Therefore, you do not have to reset the Fail-

Safe each time you fly. Should you want to

re-adjust the fail-safe preset position, access

the Fail-Safe function once again and adjust

the presets as you have just done. The

transmitter automatically recalls the settings

for the latest fail-safe adjustment.

7. To access the Programmable Mix 6 function, press

the Down key.

8. To access the Trainer function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Fail-Safe/Hold function, press the Up

and Down keys simultaneously..

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 174

175

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

TRAINER SYSTEM

6.17

The X-378 transmitter employs two separate types of

trainer systems:

1) Normal Trainer System

All functions are controlled by either the master

transmitter (MAST) or the slave transmitter (SLAVE)

2) Programmable Function Trainer

Individual channel functions may be assigned to the

slave one at a time. Since the control functions can be

transferred one by one, students can concentrate on

only one function at a time until they are competent

to fly solo with all controls.

1. Move the transmitter switch to the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press the Up or Down keys until “MAST” appears on

the center portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key to select the channel to be

adjusted. The channel name will be displayed just to

the right of “MAST.”

5. Once the channel appears that you want to make a

slave, press the (+) or (-) key. This will change the

display from “MAST” to “SLAVE.” The “N” at the upper

right portion of the LCD will also change to P. If you

want to make more slave channels, press the Channel

key until the next desired channel is shown and press

the (+) or (-) key to change the settings..

6. To change the Programmable Trainer function back

to the Normal Trainer system, press the Clear key.

7. To access the fail-safe function, press the Down key.

8. To access the Timer function, press the Up key.

9. To exit the Trainer function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Trainer function type selected (N

for Normal, P for Programmable) Current trainer mode

(Master or Slave)

Timer Function

Fail-Safe Function (PCM

Modulation is selected) Press Channel to select

the desired channel to

be programmed.

Press the (+) or (-) keys

to change the settings of

each channel.

Press Clear to reset to

the factory default

settings (Normal).

Accessing the Programmable Trainer Function

Channel to be adjusted

Channel has been set to

programmable Trainer mode

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 175

176 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

1. The slave transmitter must be PPM (Pulse Position

Modulation) and must be equipped with a DSC

(Direct Servo Control) or trainer jack. If the slave

transmitter is PPM/PCM selectable, select PPM. The

master transmitter can be PCM or PPM.

2. Plug the trainer cord (optional part #JRPA130) into

each transmitter’s DSC/Trainer jack.

Note: Each transmitter will appear to be on,

but neither is actually transmitting at this time.

3. Switch the master transmitter on. Do not switch on

the slave transmitter; it is only necessary to have the

master transmitter on.

Note: If the master transmitter is the X-378,

the LCD will indicate “TRINR” (Trainer Master)

and will list the channels that have been

programmed when the power switch is on.

4. Pull the trainer switch toward you to transfer

control to the slave. Releasing the switch

automatically reverts to the master transmitter.

5. Be sure the slave transmitter’s servo reversing, dual

rates, end-point adjustment and trims are identical to

the master transmitter. This can be checked by pulling

the trainer switch toward you. If the control surfaces

move, adjust the slave transmitter until the trainer

switch can be activated without a change of the

control surface position.

Use of the Normal Trainer System

In this mode, all functions are switched from the

master to the slave using the trainer switch. This is

the Normal mode-no function setup is necessary to

activate this system.

Use of the Programmable Trainer Function

In this mode, the master may assign functions to the

student one at a time to make learning to fly easier.

For example, the master may assign the slave aileron

and elevator. Then, when the trainer switch is

activated (pulled forward), the slave has control of

aileron and elevator only while the master retains

control of throttle and rudder.

Note: When all channels are set to master,

the Trainer System becomes normal.

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Basic Corrections and Conditions for Training

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 176

177

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

TIMER FUNCTION

6.18

The X-378 offers two separate types of timer

functions: Countown and Stopwatch. The Count-

down timer time is input in 10-second intervals up to

35 minutes. The timer can be set for each individual

model and retained in the memory for each model.

Once the Timer function has been activated, it can be

started and stopped from the normal display screen

using the Channel key. It can also be started and

stopped using the snap roll/trainer button located

at the front right portion of the transmitter. When the

X-378 is being used as the master transmitter in the

Training function, the trainer switch will not operate

the timer start/stop function, and the timer function

cannot be used.

Note: In the Countdown mode, the

transmitter will beep three times at

30 seconds, two times at 20 seconds, and

beep one time every second from 10 to 0. At

zero there will be a continuous tone for 1

second and then the timer will begin counting

up with a + indication to the left of the time

value. When used as the Stopwatch, the timer

will count up to 44 minutes, 59 seconds, at

which time it will reset to zero and continue

to count.

Timer Option Selected

Timer Value Set

Servo Reversing

Trainer Function

Press Channel to select timer

options (Off, Down-Timer,

Stop Watch).

Press the (+) or = keys to

increase or decrease the

time value.

Press Clear to reset the down

timer value to the factory

default position (10:00).

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 177

178 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 6:FUNCTIONS (FUNCTION MODE) • Sailplane

Accessing the Timer Functions

1. Place the transmitter switch in the On position.

2. Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously to

enter the Function mode.

3. Press either the Up or Down key until “TIMER” is

displayed in the left portion of the LCD.

4. Press the Channel key to select the desired timer

option (Off, Down-Timer, Stop Watch)

Setting the Down-Timer Value

5. Pressing the (+) key will change the display to :10

each time the (+) is pressed, and the value will

increase in 10-second intervals up to 59:50 minutes.

Pressing the Clear key will reset the Countdown Timer

to the factory default 10:00 minute value.

When the Down Timer function is selected, the

normal display screen will appear as shown below:

Timer Value Selected

Press the Channel key (or the

Snap Roll/Trainer/Timer button)

to start/stop the timer.

Press the Clear key to

reset to the assigned

timer value.

To access the Trainer function,

press the Down key.

To access the Servo Reversing

function, press the Up key.

To exit the Timer function, press the Down and

Channel keys simultaneously.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 178

179

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane

This section will outline the procedures and

suggested basic mechanical set-up for gliders using a

six-servo flight system with each flap and aileron

driven by a dedicated servo. The following will be

outlined:

A. Basic Mechanical Setup and Mixing (Aileron

Differential and Coupled Aileron-Rudder)

B. Presets (Launch and Reflex)

C. Landing Mode Programming

D. Full Span Variable Camber Mixing

E. Special Mixes-TE Droop with Elevator up, Reflex

with Elevator down and Snap Flaps.

Note: If you are using a 5-servo installation with

a single flap servo, all procedures will be similar.

In preparing your glider wings for servo installation

some advance planning will make the setup and

programming of the X-378 much easier. The following

basic ground rules will speed this process:

1. It is necessary that all wing-mounted servos be

installed with the output shaft facing outward toward

the wing tips.

2. Before you begin programming it is important to

set up the transmitter for multi-function sailplane

use. To do this:

A.) Turn the transmitter On while you simultaneously

hold the Down and Channel keys to enter the Function

mode. Using the Up key, move to V.TAIL mix. Use the

Channel key to move to DUAL (Dual-Flap Mix) and use

the (+) key to activate the Dual-Flap function if you

are using two flap servos.

B.) With the Up key, move the display to “LEVRS

FLAP” and press the (+) key to change the display

to “FL+LS.”

C.) Press the Down and Channel keys simultaneously

twice to move to the Function mode. Use the Up key

to move through the functions to the display that

reads “TRIM FLAP,” L6 (Channel 6). Next, use the (+)

key to change the L5 display from “ON” to “OFF.” Press

the Channel key and repeat for L5 (Channel 5). This

deactivates the channel 5 gear switch, as well as the

channel 6 flap lever to eliminate any inadvertent

changes to the flap and aileron position.

3. Use the Up key to move the display to “REV.” (Servo

reversing). Check movement of all servos and adjust

servo direction for all surfaces.

4. Use the Up key again to move to the SUB-TRIM

function. With the Channel key, move to FLAP and AUX 2

and adjust in the direction that moves the servo arms

so that they raise the flaps. (Suggested values: FLAP

UP-90; AUX 2-90)

5. With all trims in neutral, the aileron servo arms

should angle forward 20-30 degrees (see illustration

at right). This allows for more up throw mechanically.

The flap servo arms should be angled slightly to the

rear or vertical (see illustration at right). These setups

should be the same on each wing as symmetry here

helps in programming the landing mode and camber

(which will be explained later).

6. In setting up the aileron differential, it is best to

use the end-point adjustment in the TRAVL (Travel

Adjust) program. 3 or 4:1 differential is generally used

on most aileron-equipped gliders. Many pilots will

program as much up-aileron as possible and 1/8” to

1/4” down-aileron as a starting point.

7. The X-378 has the aileron/rudder coupling mix

preprogrammed in the Function mode menu. No

values are set in this program. Use the Up key to move

through the Function Setting modes to AILE-RUDD

mix. Use the Channel key to move to the mix switch

assignment for the Aileron- to-Rudder Mix. If you

want aileron/rudder coupling at all times, use the (+)

key to move the display to “ON”. To turn this mix off

for aerobatics etc., move the display to MIX. This will

allow you to use the mix switch located at the right,

top-rear of the transmitter to turn the aileron/rudder

coupling on and off.

X-378 PROGRAM AND MIX APPLICATIONS

7.1

Servo Installation

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 179

180 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane

8. To set the amount of coupling, use the Channel

key to move the display back to the “AILE-RUDD”

screen. Hold the aileron stick to one direction and,

with the (+) or (-) key, adjust the value on the display

to the desired amount of rudder movement in the

proper direction.

In the initial setup of your X-378 transmitter

(System mode), if you set the flap control preference

to FL+LS (Flap Mix switch + Flap Lever for Trim), the

setup of your Launch (and Reflex) presets is partially

done for you.

1. Pull the preset switch down to the launch preset

position. This will drop the flaps down further than

ideal for most launch situations. Move to the TRAVL

(Travel adjustment) portion of your Function mode

settings, and with the Channel key, move to the flap

channel. Reduce the value shown on the display until

you get the amount of flap throw desired for launch.

You need only adjust the flap channel (Aux 1) as the

AUX 2 channel should follow automatically in Dual-

Flap mode. This change in value should not affect the

flap throw in Crow or Camber mode either.

2. Aileron/camber (Crow) should automatically be

mixed into this launch preset if you have chosen the

FLP-D switch for the flap/aileron mix. You may have to

fine tune the aileron down throws.

3. If you wish to add some elevator up-trim to your

launch preset, use the Up key to move to FLAP-ELEV

mix. Use the Channel key to move to the switch

selection function, and then press the (+) or (-) keys

to select F-U/D. Press the Channel key twice to move to

the mix value display and add the desired amount of

up elevator for launch preset. Leave the offset for this

mix at 0.

4. To add a high rate aileron/rudder mix to the launch

preset, use the Up key and move to AILE-RUDD Mix.

Next, use the Channel key to move the display to the

switch selection screen (SW). Use the Up key to

select FLP-D. Move the flap switch to the down

position, and press the Channel key once to move to

the mix value display. The value will have to be set for

both left and right movement of the aileron stick. Set

the value at (+)30% to start. Leave the offset for this

mix at 0.

Servo Installation (continued)

Launch Preset

Servo Arm Angle

Flap Servo Arm

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:09 PM Page 180

181

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

The preset for Trailing Edge Reflex does not require

the use of the programmable mixes in the X-378 if

you are using the FL+LS function for your flaps

(System Mode).

1. Position the flap switch in the reflex (up) position.

This will make the flaps raise. Move to the TRAVL

(Travel adjustment) portion of the Function Settings

mode and adjust the flap up travel to the desired

amount of reflex.

2. To set the ailerons for reflex, use the Up key to

move to the FLAP-AILE mix display. Use the Channel

key to move to switch select and set to F-U/D. Move

to mix value with the Channel key and adjust the value

to raise ailerons to match flaps. You may have to fine

tune by adjusting the aileron travel through the Travel

Adjust (endpoint adjustment) function to achieve a

straight line along the entire trailing edge.

3. If you wish to automatically adjust elevator trim in

the reflex preset, press the Down key to move to the

FLAP-ELEV mix. Make sure the switch select for this

mix is also F-U/D and adjust the elevator trim to the

desired amount. (Generally, a slight amount of down

is used for better penetration or increased speed).

Leave the offset for this mix at 0.

4. To automatically adjust your aileron/rudder mix

with the reflex preset (in many cases you may reduce

the amount of mix), use the Up key to move to AILE-

RUDD mix . Press the Channel key to move the display

to the mix switch selection. Use the Up key to select

FLP-U. Move the flap switch to the up position. Use

the Channel key to move to the mix value display. The

value will have to be set for both left and right

movement of the aileron stick and will be a negative

value. Set the mix value for each direction at -10% to

start. Leave the offset for this mix at 0.

Snap Flaps is a function that mixes a given amount of

down flaps when a specified up elevator is given. This

aids in tight turns and can be handy when circling in

tight thermals or for changing directions quickly.

Select an unused programmable mix and mix the

elevator channel (ELEV) to the flap channel (FLAP).

Pull the elevator stick back to about 75% of its travel

and store an offset in this position.

Now pull the elevator stick full back and store a mix

value to droop the flaps to the position you desire.

Choose the switch position you want to turn off/on

the mix. Many pilots choose to leave this function

on at all times. Programmable mix 1 or 2 works well

for this.

For gliders using flaps for glide path control, the

following information will allow you to program the

X-378 for precise spot landings and safe descent from

high altitude. All of the options and mix requirements

for glide path control using flaps are incorporated

into one portion of the software. For both landings

and variable trailing edge crow (camber), you will use

SPOI-ELEV, which is part of the Function mode. There

are actually two modes (or setups) available. These

are determined by the position of what is called the

crow/camber (GEAR) mix switch (more properly the

landing/camber switch), which is located at the left,

top corner of the transmitter. Landing position for

this switch will be toward the rear of the transmitter

(POS.1 in your display). Using the SPOI-ELEV will

allow you to operate your flaps with crow (ailerons

rising up as spoilerons, if you want), with automatic

electronic elevator compensation all from the left

stick (Mode II).

This function can operate at neutral flap with the left

stick either up or down. However, the trim operates

only with the stick at the bottom position. So, if you

want to use the trim tab, neutral flap should be with

the left stick down. The digital trim lever should stay

in the center (neutral) position. The X-378’s Digital

Trim has a very noticeable audible beep at center that

is very easy to locate while flying.

Trailing Edge Reflex Preset

Snap Flaps

CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 181

182 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

1. In the Function mode, use the Up key until the

display reads “SPOI-ELEV.” Now press the Channel key

until “OFFSET” is displayed in the center of the LCD.

With the trim tab centered and the left stick in

position for neutral flap, press the Clear key to the

right of the data keys. This stores your offset or

neutral point.

2. Use the Channel key and go to SPOI-FLAP. Using the

(+) or (-) keys, program the mix value to give 90

degrees of flap throw. It may be necessary to return to

the TRAVL (travel adjustment) to fine tune the flap

throws and keep both surfaces even as they are

lowered.

3. Use the Channel key to move to SPOI-ELEV where

you can now set your elevator compensation. The

value may vary depending on the size and type of

elevator used. A starting point for all flying stabilators

will be approximately 35% down; a fixed stabilizer

with elevator will generally use a smaller percentage.

4. If you want to add crow (spoilerons), use the

Channel key to move to SPOI-AILE. With the (+) or (-)

keys, set the mix value for the desired amount of up

aileron (crow). This is an option that not all pilots will

use, but it can be a very effective tool in helping to

slow down for landing. Depending on the design of

glider you are flying, anywhere from 5-45 degrees of

crow (camber) can be useful. This basic setup will

provide you with an effective landing mode for almost

all conditions. The given values are only guidelines,

and you will need to experiment and adjust them to

your individual needs and style.

The Full Span/Variable Crow/Camber function also

uses the SPOI- portion of the Function mode. The

purpose of this function is to allow the varying of the

crow (camber) or position of the trailing edge of your

wings’ airfoil while flying, combined with the ability to

adjust to variable flying conditions. To use this

function, place the crow/camber (GEAR) switch in the

forward (0) position.

1. Use the Channel key to move the display to “SPOI-

FLAP,” switch position 0.

2. With the left stick moved to the full throw (down

flap) position, adjust the mix value for approximately

1/4” to 3/8” down flap.

2. Leave the left stick in that position and use the

Channel key to move to SPOI-AILE, switch position 0.

Use the (+) or (-) keys to move the ailerons down the

same amount as the flaps. You may have to fine tune

each aileron in the Travel Adjustment function

(TRAVL) to get a straight line along the trailing edge.

3. If you want to change elevator trim as you add crow

(camber), you can assign a value in SPOI-ELEV, switch

position 0 for this purpose.

4. If you have set the camber and the landing modes

at neutral with the left stick in the lower position

where the trim tab will function, the trailing edge will

reflex (move up) 2-3 degrees (in camber mode only)

when the trim tab is moved down. For most modern

glider airfoils, this is adequate for increased speed or

penetration in wind.

The open programmable mixes available in the X-378

allow you to enhance your presets with a variety of

mix applications. Another programming feature

included in the X-378 is the ability to assign a switch

to use for the following mixes: All programmable

mixes, Elevator-Flapperons, Aileron-Flapperons,

Flapperons-Elevator, and Flapperons-Aileron. In

addition, the latter two mixes also include a trim

offset for the flap.

Snap Flaps (continued)

CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 182

183

X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

Flapperons

CHAPTER 7: PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS • Sailplane

Following are guidelines for mixing flaps to follow

aileron movement. This mix will work as part of

the Launch and/or reflex presets at your option. The

X-378 transmitter must have the Dual-Flaps activated

in the Function mode to access the aileron/flap mix.

Aileron/Flap Mix

1. In the Function mode, use the Up key to move to

the AILE-FLAP function. Now with the Channel key,

move to the switch select to select your switch option.

2. Move to mix value with the Channel key and enter

the value for throw. There is no separate mix value for

each direction. There is no offset used with this mix.

Elevator/Flap Mix

The Elevator/Flap Mix is another optional mix that

can be used as an option with either preset or other

switch options. Different mix values are programmed

for up and down elevator throw. This mix is generally

used with slope aerobatics, or for multi-task speed

and distance tasks.

1. From the aileron/flap mix, use the Down key to

move to ELEV-FLAP function. Now press the Channel

key to move to switch select. In many multi-task

applications this mix will be used with reflex (FLP-U).

2. Press the Channel key to move back to mix value and

enter for desired direction and throw. The most

common is to drop the wing trailing edge with up elevator.

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 183

184 X-378 MANUAL Sailplane

CHAPTER 8: DATA SHEET • Sailplane

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 184

•Do not lubricate servo gears or motors.

•Do not overload retract servos during retracted

or extended conditions. Make sure they are

allowed to travel their full deflection.

Overloading or stalling the retract servo can

cause excessive current drain.

•Make sure that all servos move freely through

their rotations and that no linkages hang up or

bind. A binding control linkage can cause a

servo to draw excessive current. A stalled servo

can drain a battery pack in a matter of minutes.

• Correct any control surface "buzz" or "flutter" as

soon as it is noticed in flight, as this condition

can destroy the feedback potentiometer in the

servo. It may be extremely dangerous to ignore

such "buzz" or "flutter."

• Use the supplied rubber grommets and brass

servo eyelets when mounting your servos. Do

not over-tighten the servo mounting screws, as

this negates the dampening effect of the

rubber grommets.

•Ensure that the servo horn is securely fastened

to the servo. Use only the JR servo arm screws

provided; the thread size is different from that

used by other manufacturers.

•Do not continue to use the servo arms when

they become "yellowed" or discolored. Such

servo arms may be brittle and can snap at any

time, possibly causing the aircraft to crash.

•Check all related mounting screws and linkages

frequently. Aircraft often vibrate, causing linkages

and screws to loosen.

Radio controlled models are a great source of

pleasure. Unfortunately, they can also pose a

potential hazard if not maintained and operated

properly. It is imperative that you install your radio

control system correctly. Additionally, your level of

piloting competency must be high enough to

ensure that you are able to control your aircraft

under all conditions. If you are a newcomer to radio

controlled flying, please seek help from an

experienced pilot or your local hobby shop.

Safety Do's and Don'ts for Pilots

• Ensure that your batteries have been properly

charged prior to initial flight.

• Keep track of the time that the system is turned

on so that you will have an idea of how long you

can safely operate your system.

• Perform a ground range check prior to the initial

flight of the day. See the "Daily Flight Checks

Section" for information on how to do so.

• Check all control surfaces prior to each takeoff.

• Use frequency flags.

• Do not fly your model near spectators, parking

areas or at any other area that could result in

injury to people or damage of property.

• Do not fly during adverse weather conditions.

Poor visibility can cause disorientation and loss

of control of your aircraft. Strong winds can

cause similar problems.

• Do not fly unless your frequency is clear.

Warning: Only one transmitter at a time can

operate on a given frequency. If you turn on

your transmitter while someone else is

operating a model on your frequency, both

pilots will lose control of their models. Only

one person can use a given frequency at a

time. It does not matter if it is AM, FM or

PCM—only one frequency at a time.

• Do not point the transmitter antenna directly

toward the model. The radiation pattern from

the tip of the antenna is inherently low.

• Do not take chances. If at any time during flight

you observe any erratic or abnormal operation,

land immediately and do not resume flight until

the cause of the problem has been ascertained

and corrected. Safety can never be taken lightly.

SECTION V: IMPORTANT INFORMATION

SERVO PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL NOTES

X-378 MANUAL 185

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 185

186 X-378 MANUAL

1. Purpose

This advisory outlines safety standards for

operations of model aircraft. We encourage

voluntary compliance with these standards.

2. Background

Attention has been drawn to the increase in model

aircraft operation. There is a need for added caution

when operating free flight and radio controlled craft

in order to avoid creating a noise nuisance or a

potential hazard to full-scale aircraft and persons

and/or property on the surface.

3. Operating Standards

Modelers generally are concerned with safety and

exercise good judgment when flying model aircraft.

However, in the interest of safer skies, we encourage

operators of radio controlled and free flight models

to comply with the following standards:

a. Exercise vigilance in locating full-scale aircraft

(get help if possible) so as not to create a collision

hazard.

b. Select an operating site at sufficient distance

from populated areas so you do not create a

noise problem or a potential hazard.

c. Do not fly higher than 400 feet above the

surface.

d. Always operate more than three miles from the

boundary of an airport unless you are given

permission to be closer by the appropriate air

traffic control facility in the case of an airport for

which a control zone has been designated or by

the airport manager in the case of other airports.

e. Do not hesitate to ask for assistance in

complying with these guidelines at the airport

traffic control tower or air route traffic control

center nearest the site of your proposed

operation.

Information Provided By:

Director, Air Traffic Service Federal Aviation

Administration, Washington, D.C.

1. Check the battery voltage on both the transmitter

and the receiver battery packs. Do not fly below 9.0V

on the transmitter or below 4.7V on the receiver. To

do so can crash your aircraft.

Note: When you check these batteries,

ensure that you have the polarities correct

on your expanded scale voltmeter.

2. Check all hardware (linkages, screws, nuts, and

bolts) prior to each day's flight. Be sure that binding

does not occur and that all parts are is properly

secured.

3. Ensure that all surfaces are moving in the proper

manner.

4. Perform a ground range check before each day's

flying session. The range check should be as follows:

• Do not extend the transmitter antenna at this

time. Turn the transmitter "on."

• Turn the model "on."

• Slowly walk away from the model while moving

the control surfaces. The aircraft should function

properly at a distance of 60-75 feet.

5. Prior to starting your aircraft, turn off your

transmitter, then turn it back on. Do this each time

you start your aircraft. If any critical switches are on

without your knowledge, the transmitter alarm will

warn you at this time.

6. Check that all trim levers are in the proper location.

7. All servo pigtails and switch harness plugs should

be secured in the receiver. Make sure that the switch

harness moves freely in both directions.

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION

DAILY FLIGHT CHECKS

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 186

187

X-378 MANUAL

72 MHz requires no special license to operate.

Transmitter Crystal Replacement Notice:

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

requires that changes in transmitter frequency must

be performed only by an authorized service

technician (Horizon Service Center).

Any transmitter frequency changes made by a

non-certified technician may result in a violation

of FCC rules.

Channels 12–14 are not available through JR.

FREQUENCY CHART

Ch.No. Frequency

11 72.010

12 72.030

13 72.050

14 72.070

15 72.090

16 72.110

17 72.130

18 72.150

19 72.170

20 72.190

21 72.210

22 72.230

23 72.250

24 72.270

25 72.290

26 72.310

27 72.330

28 72.350

29 72.370

30 72.390

31 72.410

32 72.430

33 72.450

34 72.470

35 72.490

Ch.No. Frequency

36 72.510

37 72.530

38 72.550

39 72.570

40 72.590

41 72.610

42 72.630

43 72.650

44 72.670

45 72.690

46 72.710

47 72.730

48 72.750

49 72.770

50 72.790

51 72.810

52 72.830

53 72.850

54 72.870

55 72.890

56 72.910

57 72.930

58 72.950

59 72.970

60 72.990

Low Band 72 MHz High Band 72 MHz

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 187

188 X-378 MANUAL

Important: Be sure to keep your original

dated sales receipt, as you will be required

to provide proof-of -purchase date for the

equipment to be serviced under warranty.

Warranty Coverage

Your new JR Remote Control Radio System is

warranted to the original purchaser against

manufacturer defects in material and workmanship

for an unprecedented 3 years from the date of

purchase. During this period, Horizon Service

Center will repair or replace, at our discretion, any

component that is found to be factory defective at

no cost to the purchaser. This warranty is limited to

the original purchaser of the unit and is not

transferable.

This warranty does not apply to any unit that has

been improperly installed, mishandled, abused or

damaged in a crash, or to any unit that has been

repaired or altered by any unauthorized agencies.

Under no circumstances will the buyer be entitled

to consequential or incidental damages. This

limited warranty gives you specific legal rights; you

also have other rights, which may vary from state to

state. As with all fine electronic equipment, do not

subject your radio system to extreme temperatures,

humidity or moisture. Do not leave it in direct

sunlight for long periods of time.

Repair Service Directions

In the event that your JR radio needs service, please

follow the instructions listed below.

1. Check all on/off switches to be sure they are off.

This will speed the repair process of checking

battery condition.

2. Return your system components only (transmitter,

receiver, servos, etc.). Do not return your system

installed in a model aircraft, car, boat, etc.

3. Preferably, use the original carton/packaging

(molded foam container), or equivalent, to ship

your system. Do not use the system carton itself as

a shipping carton, you should package the system

carton within a sturdy shipping container using

additional packing material to safeguard against

damage during transit. Include complete name and

address information inside the carton, as well as

clearly writing it on the outer label/return address

area.

4. Include detailed information explaining your

operation of the system and problem(s)

encountered. Provide an itemized list of equipment

enclosed and identify any particular area/function,

which may better assist our technicians in

addressing your concerns. Within your letter, advise

us of the payment method you prefer to use.

Horizon Service Center accepts VISA or MasterCard.

Please include your card number and expiration

date. Date your correspondence, and be sure your

complete name and address appear on this

enclosure.

5. Include your name, mailing address, and a phone

number where you can be reached during the

business day.

Warranty Repairs

To receive warranty service, you must include a copy

of your original dated sales receipt to verify your

proof-of-purchase date. Providing that warranty

conditions have been met, your radio will be

repaired without charge.

Normal Non-Warranty Repairs

Should your repair cost exceed 50% of the retail

purchase cost, you will be provided with an

estimate advising you of your options.

Mail your system to:

Horizon Service Center

4105 Fieldstone Road

Champaign, IL 61822

Phone: (217) 355-9511

WARRANTY INFORMATION

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 188

189

X-378 MANUAL

Notes:

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 189

190 X-378 MANUAL

Notes:

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 190

191

X-378 MANUAL

Notes:

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 191

192 X-378 MANUAL

Horizon Hobby Inc.,

4105 Fieldstone Road

Champaign, IL 61822

www.horizonhobby.com

Phone: (217) 355-9511

4682 JR X-378 • ALL 7/23/02 10:10 PM Page 192

Horizon Hobby X378 X-378 7 Channel FM Radio System User Manual X378 Instruction Manual

Horizon Hobby, LLC X-378 7 Channel FM Radio System X378 Instruction Manual

X378 Instruction Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation